QC Industries 125, 125Z and 250 Series Catalog by QC Industries

QC Industries

LLC

Low profile conveyors

Product Catalog

Driven by customers ... powered by proven products

Contents

Page

125 Series Standard Conveyors Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Gang Driving Automation Accessories

116-117 8 9 10 11 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Gang Driving Automation Accessories

Page 116-117 12 13 14 15 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

116-117 16 17 18 19 20-21 22-25 26-27 28-29 30-37 38-40 41 42-43

125 Series Cleated Conveyors

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors

Page

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Automation Accessories

QC Industries

513.753.6000

116-117 44 45 46 47 52-53 54-57 58 59 60-65 66 67

125 Series Cleated Corrosion Resistant Conveyors

Page Application Assistance Form Specifications & Dimensions Features & Benefits Technical Data How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories Automation Accessories

116-117 48 49 50 51 52-53 54-57 58 59 60-65 66 67

125 Z Series Angled Frame Conveyors

Page Application Assistance Form Z - Specifications & Dimensions Z - Features & Benefits L - Specifications & Dimensions L - Features & Benefits R - Specifications & Dimensions R - Features & Benefits U - Specifications & Dimensions U - Features & Benefits N - Specifications & Dimensions N - Features & Benefits Technical Data-How to Size & Order Guides, Flared Side Rails & Hoppers Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories

118-119 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78-81 82-83 84-85 86-89 90-91

Application Assistance Form End Drive Specifications & Dimensions End Drive Features & Benefits End Drive Technical Data End Drive How to Order Center Drive Specifications & Dimensions Center Drive Features & Benefits Center Drive Technical Data Center Drive How to Order Belting Side & Guide Rails Automation Accessories Mounts Stands Drives & Mounting Packages Drive Accessories

120-121 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100-101 102-103 104 105 106-107 108-113 114-115

250 Series End & Center Drive Conveyors

Page

Additional Information Page Learn about QC Industries Conveyor Selection Guide Warranty & Returned Goods Information

QC Industries

513.753.6000

4-7 123 122

Standing the Test of Time Since 1981 companies from around the world have been relying on QC Industries for their conveyor needs. Our 55,000 square foot corporate headquarters, located in Cincinnati, Ohio, offers visitors a 2000 square foot display room filled with a full assortment of operating conveyors and interactive conveyor displays. Come visit us and get hands-on with your next conveyor project!

Special Orders: Our Specialty If you're looking for something a little different than our standard conveyors, just contact us and we'll customize it for you. Whether it's a simple bracket to integrate with a customized piece of equipment, full assembly of a turnkey project, or a completely new conveyor design to make your application parameters work; give us a call. We stand ready to discuss your needs in detail.

Driven One-Stop Shopping We offer standard low profile conveyors that are less than 2 inches in their overall height. Our standard units range from 2 inches wide up to 24 inches wide and up to 25 feet in length. We offer a variety of styles including Standard Automation Conveyors, Cleated Belt Conveyors, Magnetic Conveyors, Corrosion Resistant Conveyors and five configurations of Angled Frame Conveyors. We also have a large selection of standard accessories to customize every conveyor including sides, guides, mounts, stands, motion detection and more...

Voice of the Customer QC Industries is a Lean Manufacturing Company. In 2003 our company decided to go "Lean" and we intend to continue with our lean efforts into the future. From "Policy Deployment" to "Six Sigma Quality" to "Kaizen Events", we personify continual improvement. All of our products are designed based on the "Voice of the Customer", and our "5S Committee" is constantly ensuring that we are creating a self-disciplined and selfsustaining culture to build a stronger organization.

Lifetime Performance

Application Spectrum

As standard, our conveyors are constructed of high impact-resistant heavy duty 10 gauge steel; a framework that is laser cut and formed as one solid piece. This single-body frame design is cutting edge technology that ensures frame integrity and overall conveyor performance. Our conveyors are also designed to allow for bearing lubrication on the fly. This results in zero down time during regular maintenance, saving our customers both time and money. Belt tracking is designed into both ends of our conveyors for precision adjustments in the field. Our conveyors are built to last.

Packaging Workcell Assembly OEM Machine Integration Injection Molding Pharmaceutical Food Processing Labeling Bar Code Scanning High Heat & Hot Part Applications Metal Stamping Incline/Decline Operations Overhead Pick Off & Transfer Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Part Separation Clean Rooms

Customers

State-of-the-Art Manufacturing Great products are made on great equipment; and our products are made on the industry's finest equipment. From fully automated robotic lasers used to manufacture our fabricated components to high tech computer-controlled CNC machinery used to produce our machine components, we personify state-of-the-art manufacturing. We take pride in delivering quality in every product we produce.

Worldwide Distribution Network With representative organizations located throughout the U.S., Canada, Mexico, Europe & Australia, our extensive network of distributors and manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s representatives are ready to help you with all your conveyor needs. We have multiple representation in most localities to cover the variety of markets that we serve, enabling us to offer specialists within given industries. Give us a call on your next conveyor project and let us help you size up a winner.

Experienced Tech Support We have experienced engineers ready right now to assist you with the most difficult of applications. We also pride ourselves on having highly trained inside sales representatives assigned to every customer, so we can provide individualized service from the beginning of the quote to post-shipping and follow up. If you need assistance in the field after the sale, we have factory service technicians that can be dispatched for travel directly to your site. We strive to exceed your expectations.

Superior Quality Assurance Quality assurance and customer satisfaction are top priority at QC Industries. All of our conveyors are assembled and tested prior to leaving the factory. We adhere to a strict three-signature sign off system. The first step requires technicians to take ownership and personally sign off on orders they have filled; the next two tests and signatures are extra steps in ensuring that you receive exactly what you have ordered. We strive to get it right for you the first time.

Powered 24-Hour Quote Turnaround In today's fast paced business world, when you need a quote, most often you need it fast. We pride ourselves on turning quotes around to our customers within 24 hours of receiving the application parameters. We recognize that time is money and to that end, we want to earn your respect. Give us a call and put us to the test ... you'll be glad you did.

World Class Delivery Once you have sized your application and placed your order, the last thing you need to worry about is whether or not it will ship on time. At QC Industries we provide world class on-time delivery. We also institute continual improvement efforts focused at continuing to be the industry's best. Our flexible inventory system allows us to expedite orders when needed and ship conveyors same day if necessary. Once your order has shipped, your organization can receive a confirmation and tracking information to follow your order right to your dock door.

Computer-Aided Design We offer CAD disks to help you lay out your applications quickly and precisely. We also offer CAD information online. If we are designing something special for your application, we can provide a full 3D model for â&#x20AC;&#x153;drop inâ&#x20AC;? integration with your CAD package. We are continually striving to provide the necessary tools you need to succeed on your next conveyor project.

by Proven

Check Out Our Web Site Go online to www.qcindustries.com and learn more about our organization. You will find links to all the products that QC Industries has available, many of which are not covered in this catalog. You will also find where we are exhibiting at trade shows, directions to our facility, and links to sign up for our QC Communicator newsletter; which offers insightful information into our products and applications. Information is available at your fingertips right now, so go for it!

Innovative Design A benchmark of the QC Industries design is an eccentric snap out sealed idler cartridge that allows single point belt tensioning and, therefore, the fastest belt change on the market. This belt change is normally achieved without ever having to remove or adjust our drive packages. We challenge you to find that in our competition. Our conveyors are also designed with a cutting edge crowned floating pulley system with thrust washers. This technology protects your bearings against offcenter loading, and controls belt misalignment that might otherwise result from camber.

Products A World-Class Company We have built our reputation by combining innovative designs with high quality and exceptional service, earning the respect of end users and system integrators around the globe. Our extensive network of return customers powers us every day. Our customers become customers for life. Let us show you why.

125 Series Standard Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm

*See Technical Data on page 10

Overview Dimensions

.75

.42

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

6.13

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

W + 2.33

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.89 *

.75 .82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE

.88

L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly • Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design, or hex through shaft design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Standard Conveyors Technical Data Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 10-A 500

Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

450

400 350 300

300 250

250

Lbs.

150

1. Nominal Load

100 50

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 10-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

225

200

100 75 75 50 37.5 3

125

100

175

150

87.5

6 8 Belt Width

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 11

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

2. Accumulation

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load from Line One times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 20 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter result on Line Two.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 10-B

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 10-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Three.

Equivalnt Load Constant

3.0

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

4. Side Seals

2.6

2.5

2.8

2.9

3.0

3.1

2.5 2.3

2.0

2.1 1.8

1.5

1.6 1.4

1.0

1.1 0.8

0.5

0.6 0.3

If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise, multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on page 22. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.

5. Conveyor Friction

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37) Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

200

168 132

150

lbs.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

0.0

Conveyor Friction - Figure 10-C

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add 4 to the conveyor width in inches, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 10-C. Enter result on Line Five.

Angle Factor

Equivalent Load

STOP

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 10-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

0.0

96 100

84 72

0 Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

How to Order

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Length

Step 4

Step 3

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

1 E S

125 Series Standard

Step 2

Step 1

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

1 = 125

E = End Drive

S = Standard

Frame Style

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - Contact factory

Step 2 Lengths*

Widths 2”

3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

36”

48”

60”

72”

96”

120” 144”

024

036

048

060

072

096

120

144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location C

d ar

an St

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

B A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

Cap

1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type S

Solid Output Shaft Thru

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Hex Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output

H D

d ar

an St

Standard

n io 43 pt g. Oep se

Rolling Nosebar

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4 Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 20-21. Example: 1ESBH02-048-ASQ-MAA 125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 2” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt. Optional: Snap-In Wiper is used with smooth surfaced, low friction belts for residue removal. This item snaps into the underside of the conveyor frame and can be installed at either end of the conveyor. Shown here on the drive end. To Order: Fill in the last two digits of the part number with the conveyor width

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Note: proceed to page 22 to continue sizing your conveyor...

Part Number: 125-0192-WW Example: 125-0192-08 Snap-In Wiper for an 8” wide conveyor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Cleated Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple Cleat Heights Available

*See Technical Data on page 14

Overview Dimensions

.75

.42

6.13

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W - 1.37 = CLEAT WIDTH 1.89 *

.82

CLEAT HEIGHT SEE PAGE 51

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

.88

.75

L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats

Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 15 Step 4 for options

Drive Assembly • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia

• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease

• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease

• Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions

• Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions

• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

• Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design, dual solid output design, or hex through shaft design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Cleated Conveyors Technical Data Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A 500 450

450 400

350

Lbs.

Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

300

300 250

250 150

150 100 50

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 14-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

1. Nominal Load

225

200

100 75 75 50 37.5

100

175

150

125

87.5

6 8 Belt Width

Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 15 Above Aboveload loadcarrying carryingcapacities capacitiesare arefor forboth bothdrive drivepushing pushingand andpulling pullingapplications. applications. Note: Note:for fordrive drivepushing pushingapplications, applications,decrease decreaseload loadcapacity capacityofofconveyor conveyorby by1/2. 1/2.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 14-B

Enter result on Line Two.

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines One and Two together, please reference Figure 14-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

2.9

3.0

3.1

2.5 2.3

2.0

2.1 1.8

1.5

1.6 1.4

1.0

1.1 0.8 0.6 0.3

0.0 Angle Factor

0.0 0

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

Conveyor Friction - Figure 14-C 200

168 132

150

Enter result on Line Three.

lbs.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)

QC Industries

2.8

2.6

2.5

0.5

513.753.6000

Equivalent Load

3. Conveyor Friction

Equivalnt Load Constant

3.0

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 14-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One.

STOP

96 100

84 72

0 Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

How to Order Step 2

Step 1

# of Cleats # of Cleats # of Cleats

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

1 E S

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

1 = 125

E = End Drive

S = Standard

B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - Contact factory

Step 2 Lengths*

Widths 2”

3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

36”

48”

60”

72”

96”

120” 144”

024

036

048

060

072

096

120

144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location C

d ar

an St

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

B A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

Cap

Tail Pulley Type

1/2” Dia*

Solid Output Shaft Thru

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Hex Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output

d ar

an St

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Standard

Detectable

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4 Choose a base belt material and cleat height Base Belt Material

5mm

19mm

1/2”

MAA (Standard Urethane) UAC (White Urethane)

CAB CBB

CAD CBD

CAE CBE

3/4” CAF CBF

1” w/corr. sides

1”

2”

3”

CAH CBH

CAG CBG

CAI CBI

CAK CBK

Note 1: All belts must have a cleat indent of width minus 1.37”, except 1” cleats with corrugated sidewall. That cleat indent is width minus 3.62” Note 2: Cleated belts are intended for use in conjunction with indented or adjustable guides (see page 23)

Step 5 Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats. Example: 1ESBH06-048-ASQ-CAE016 125 Series conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 6” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors Specifications

• • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm

*See Technical Data on page 18

Overview Dimensions

2.69 NO MAGNETS

NO MAGNETS 4.00

.42

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W + 2.33

MAGNET SPACING SEE PAGE 19

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

1.89 *

.82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE

.88

.75

L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Ceramic magnets are custom positioned within the conveyor framework to achieve an optimum magnetic field and smooth product movement for your application • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Drive Assembly • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia

• Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease

• Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease

• Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions

• Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Magnetic Conveyors Technical Data

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 14-A 500

Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

400 350 Lbs.

250

Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gearmotor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

100

To achieve magnetic pull, there are rows of magnets down the length of the conveyor. The maximum number of rows can be determined by dividing the conveyor width by two (not to exceed eight rows). Choose the number of magnet rows and then multiply the load by the factor from Figure 18-B. Enter result on Line Two.

225

200

150

150 25

100 75 75 50 37.5 3

125

100

175

150

87.5

6 8 Belt Width

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

Magnetic Load Factors - Figure 18-B 0.80

Equivalent Load Constant

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) metal parts weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 18-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry (to ensure it can carry the load). Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

250

Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 19

2. Magnetic Factor

300

1. Nominal Load

450

0.74

0.60 0.46 0.39

0.40 0.30 0.23 0.20

0.16 0.08 0.01

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline, enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications, choose a factor from Figure 18-C based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. Enter result on Line Three.

3 4 5 6 Number of Magnet Rows

2.5

2.6

2.8

Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

3.1

2.1 1.8

1.5

1.6 1.4

1.0

1.1 0.8

0.5

0.6 0.3

0.0 Angle

0.0 0

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

Conveyor Friction - Figure 18-D 200

Equivalent Load

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (See pages 30-37)

3.0

2.3

2.0

168 132

150

lbs.

2.9

2.5

Factor

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

3.0

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 18-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

5. Conveyor Friction

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 18-C

STOP

Equivalnt Load Constant

4. Side Seals

0.00

96 100

84 72

0 Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

How to Order Step 1

Step 3

Step 2

Row Spacing

6” Sections on Row

6” Section from Tail

Number of rows

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

1 E M E H

Step 5

Step 4

See Step 5 below Consult factory

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

1 = 125

E = End Drive

M = Magnetic

E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

H = Straight Frame

Step 2 Lengths*

Widths 2”

3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

36”

48”

60”

72”

96”

120” 144”

024

036

048

060

072

096

120

144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location D

an St

n io 41 pt g. Oep se

B A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

Cap

1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type d

Solid Output Shaft Thru

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Hex Hex Input 1/2” Dia* Dual Output

r da

an St

Standard

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4 Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 20 and 21.

Step 5 Please send the part to be conveyed to our Sales Department to evaluate for proper magnetic arrangement. Ceramic magnets are positioned in a stainless steel frame according to each application. This permits a wide variety of magnetic field strengths and location options. Our application specialists will complete the part number for you. Below is an illustration of how we document the magnet spacing.

3 Number of magnet sections from tail 1 Number of rows

2 Distance from tail before magnetic field begins 4

Row Spacing

Note: proceed to page 22 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Multi-Purpose Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Option #2-Spill Edge Cleat D. Option #3-Perforated Belt High Friction Belts A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion B. Green High Tack PVC C. Beige FDA High Adhesion D. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion E. Black Rough Top High Adhesion Accumulation Belts (Low Friction) A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator Heat-Resistant Belts A. White Silicone Heat Resistor B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor C. Smooth White FDA Silicone Heat Resistor D. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor E. White Nitrile Heat Resistor Cut Resistant Belts A. Yellow Cut Resistor B. Standard Urethane C. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor D. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor FDA Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Pure White FDA D. Woven White FDA E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion Static Conductive Belts A. Textured Carbon Impregnated B. Accumulation Static Conductive C. Low Friction Static Conductive D. Structured Static Conductive Translucent Belts A. Green Translucent Accumulator B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator Color Contrasting Belts A. Gray Textured Contraster B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster C. Dark Green PVC Contraster D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster Non-Marking Belts A. Felt Topped Product Protector B. Fabric Topped Product Protector C. Cotton Topped Product Protector D. Black Elastomer Product Protector Release Properties Belts A. Beige Silicone Product Release B. White PVC Product Release C. Textured Silicone Product Release D. Smooth Habilene Product Release E. Smooth Silicone Product Release Specialty/Profile Belts A. Green Sawtooth Profile Belt B. White Grooved Rubber C. Stipple Top PVC Profile D. Negative Pyramid Profile E. Green Longitudinal PVC Profile Belt

FDA

Belt Colo r

Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho r Max t Term P Tem a pera rt ture Max (째F) . Tem Ambien t pera ture Operati ng (째F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )

l teria e Ma Top Surf ac

scri e De Top Surf ac

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Orde ring Cod e

ptio n

125 Series Conveyors

MAA Smooth MAB Smooth, Sealed Edge MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat MAD Smooth, Perforations

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane

White White White White

YES YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW LOW

212 212 212 212

176 176 176 176

YES YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075

FAA FAB FAC FAD FAF

Snakeskin Matte Smooth Longitudinal Groove Rough Top

PVC PVC Soft Silicone PVC PVC

Light Grey Dark Green Beige Black Black

NO NO YES NO NO

HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH

212 212 212 194 212

176 176 176 158 176

NO YES YES YES YES

0.103 0.145 0.072 0.083 0.185

AAA AAC AAD AAE

Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES NO NO YES

VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW

212 248 140 175

176 212 140 175

YES NO YES YES

0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054

HAA HAB HAC HAD HAE

Fine Texture Fabric Smooth Coarse Structure Smooth

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Silicone Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber

White White White Blue White

NO NO YES NO NO

MED LOW MED MED MED

356 356 400 300 300

356 356 350 212 212

YES YES NO YES YES

0.059 0.051 0.085 0.079 0.067

IAA IAB IAC IAD

Smooth Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Urethane Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

Yellow White Black Black

NO YES NO NO

LOW LOW HIGH MED

230 212 248 176

194 176 212 176

YES YES YES YES

0.060 0.075 0.083 0.100

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane

White White White Translucent White

YES YES YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH

212 212 230 248 176

176 176 194 212 176

YES YES YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.061 0.047 0.050

EAA EAB EAC EAD

Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured

Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece

Black Black Black Black

NO NO NO NO

MED HIGH LOW MED

212 212 158 176

176 212 158 176

104e 104e 105e 105e

0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100

TAA TAB TAC

Textured Fabric Textured

Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES

VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW

175 248 176

175 212 176

NO NO NO

0.023 0.024 0.040

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE

Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black

NO YES NO YES NO

MED LOW MED MED MED

158 176 212 212 212

158 176 176 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071

NAA NAB NAC NAD

Felt Fabric Fabric Felt

Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester

White YES White YES Natural White YES Black NO

MED MED MED MED

175 175 175 302

175 175 175 248

NO NO NO YES

0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098

RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE

Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured

Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone

Beige White White White White

YES YES NO YES YES

HIGH LOW MED MED LOW

212 194 356 176 176

176 158 356 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040

SAA SAB SAC SAD SAE

Sawtooth Lateral Groove Stipple Top Textured Longitudinal Groove

PVC Nitrile Rubber PVC Urethane PVC

Green White White White Green

NO YES YES YES NO

HIGH HIGH MED MED HIGH

212 225 212 212 175

176 225 176 176 175

YES NO NO YES YES

0.177 0.210 0.106 0.078 0.175

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the broad spectrum of chemicals and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in chemical application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand the chemicals present as well as the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a wide variety of applications and industries. These pages cover a number of the more popular belts we have provided through the years. These belts have all been tested at QC Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 125 Series conveyors. If you have a specific need that is not covered on these pages, please

contact one of our sales engineers directly at the factory to discuss your application parameters.

To Order Belt Only: Choose nominal conveyor width and length in inches and enter the three-digit belt code.

To Order With Conveyor: Please use the three-digit QC belt code number for conveyor ordering on pages 11, 15, and 19.

1E - WW - LLL Example: 1E-08-120-MAA Standard urethane belt for an 8â&#x20AC;? wide by 120â&#x20AC;? long 125 Series conveyor

Multi-Purpose Belts

QUICK SHIP!

B FA

C FA

D FA

High-Friction Belts

A FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

Heat-Resistant Belts

Cut-Resistant Belts

FDA/USDA Belts

Static Conductive Belts

B TA

C TA

B PA

C PA

Translucent Belts

A TA Color Contrasting Belts

A PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

Release Properties Belts

Specialty/Profile Belts

Chemical Resistant Belts Due to the wide variety of chemical and percentages of chemical mixtures, QC Industries offers belt selection assistance in these application circumstances. Our application specialists will help determine which belt is best suited to withstand not only the chemicals present, but the entire scope of the application parameters. This approach delivers the best possible product for the application.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails Fixed Side Rails

W + 1.06

W - .61

W - .19

W + .06

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 125-0153-

2.35

2.22

1/3” Side Rails

.46 *

.33 *

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0169-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0170-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0169-096

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0170-024

125-0169 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0153-048

W + 1.19

W + .06 W + .06

W - .19

W - .61 .78

.93 *

.78

.93 *

2.81

2.91

2.81

2.03

1” Side Rails

.88

1.03 *

2.03

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0178-

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0177-

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 125-0174-

125-0178 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0174-048

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0177-024

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0178-096

W + 1.19

W + .06

W - .18

W - .61

1.93 *

1.78

1.93 *

1.78

3.81 2.03

2” Side Rails

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 125-0215-

125-0215 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0215-024

2.05 *

1.90 3.93

3.81 2.03

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with seals** Part No. 125-0217To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0217-036

2.03

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125-0216To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125-0216-060

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 20 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails

3.00 ADJ.

W - .10 MAX.

W - .25 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. *

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX 2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0282-

W + 9.12 MAX. 1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0281-

2-Axis Adjustable Guides 125-0281-048-T pictured

3.00 ADJ.

W -.38 MAX.

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal length of the conveyor. Choose a set screw adjustment or a thumb wheel adjustment mechanism by indicating (S) for set screw and (T) for thumb wheel at the end of the part number.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

Example 125-0281-120 -T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor. The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42 W - 1.21 W - 1.21

2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 3.94

3.28

1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. *

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0219-

Indented Guides

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0218-

125-0219 pictured

W + 1.57 W - 1.31 To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. 3.03 * 4.92

Example 125-0219-120 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor. The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts. Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 15). The Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket which surrounds the product being conveyed.

3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 125-0222*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Side Rails & Guide Rails Tee Slotted Extrusions 10-32 UNF THRU To Order: Use part number 125-0074-035 (Qty. 1) 125-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)

.25

.19

The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to hold lightweight brackets that have a thickness of .148” or under

.86

The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with the following rails and bolt on profiles: 1” - 125-0174, 125-0177, 125-0178 2” - 125-0215, 125-0217, 125-0216 Tee - 125-0225, 125-0199

Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125-0074-035 (Qty 1) Part No. 125-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)

Rotate-In Tee Nut

Note: The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails shown on page 22, as well as the Single Tee Slot and the Multi Tee Slot extrusions shown below.

W + 2.68

W + 1.28

W + 1.50

.73 *

1.16

Multi Tee Slot

Multi Tee Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125-0225-

Single Tee Slot

To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Single Tee Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125-0199To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Product Containment Accessories W + 3.25 MAX. W + 1.50 MIN. W - .61

LANES

.33 * 3.86 MAX. 3.29 MIN.

RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3" RAILS

W + 1.56

Lane Dividers

Lane Dividers For part number see below

Hinged Side Extenders Shown with 1/3” side rail with seal

Hinged Side Extenders For part number see below

To Order:

Construction (S - Standard) Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3 etc) Conveyor Length (in inches) Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

QC Industries

Example LD-2-08144-12FS 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

513.753.6000

Hinged Side Extenders bolt directly onto the frame of the conveyor, and can be used in conjunction with 1/3” side rails. Note: Only available in 24” and 36” lengths. To obtain a longer length of hinged side, please use combinations of 24” and 36” lengths. 36” Long Part No. 125-1003-036 However, all length combinations must equal 24” Long Part No. 125-1003-024 12” less than the nominal conveyor length. *Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Flared Side Rails Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The rails attach to and require the use of the adjustable guide rails shown at the top of page 23. Additionally, the user can add other components (shown below) to help guide the product as needed. Note: Flared Side Rails should be ordered one size smaller than the nominal length of the conveyor.

W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN. 45°

W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.

4.00

To Order: Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048

Flared Side Rails L

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide (sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S

.25

5.74 MAX. * 4.93 MIN. *

12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48”

length length length length length length length

Example: (1) Z-1004-036 A set of 36” long flared side rails The rails are sold in sets and include mounting hardware Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL-S shown on page 23

L = length of flared side rails

End Stops are used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. Stops are adjustable down the length of the rail. Note: End stops are available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10”, 12”, 18”, and 24”.

2.90

To Order: .90

8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

2.35 *

Example: (1) 125-0234-10 One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails

End Stops

Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL-S, #Z-1004-LLL

L L - 4.20 MAX. L - 5.80 MAX.

2.35 *

8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

Example: (2) 125-0234-10 Two end stops for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails

Adjustable Hopper Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

L = length of flared side rails

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Mounts Standard Mounts .22 DIA. .41

.59

1.15

.88

1.32

.31

.13

3.06

.38 SLOT

2.06 * 1.25

.135

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

3.50

Universal Adjustable Side Mount 125-0181-04 pictured

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

W + 1.46

.34 DIA.

Part No. 125-0181-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)* Part No. 125-0181-05 (For use with multi-tier stand)*

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats. Tee Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

W + 1.46

.34 DIA.

.22 DIA.

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

.59

1.53

.88

.13

.31

3.10

5.28 *

4.81

3.07

1.25

.38 SLOT

Universal Raised Side Mount

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

.135

3.50

125-0182-04 pictured

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 22 & 24. Part No. 125-0182-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)* *Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.

5/16 DIA. THRU HOLE

1.00

.22

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” side rails, 2” side rails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 22 & 24.

To Order: .66

2.04 *

1.60 .135

Tee Mount

Attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

1.56

3.00

W + 1.37

4.00

W + 2.00

Part No. 125-0010-00*

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Can also be used at tail end of conveyor in conjunction with drive end mounts (125-0014-00, 125-0013-00, and 125-0015-00). Cannot be used with cleated belts.

5/16-18 SET SCREW

.63

11/32 DIA.

.257 DIA. THRU HOLE 1.25 .16

2.89 * .43

.84 W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00

Universal Bottom Mount

W + 1.50

Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. Cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

To Order: Attaches directly to the underside of the conveyor frame. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125-0011-WW * Example: 125-0011-04* Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor *Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Standard Mounts .93 *

Standard method for mounting to stands (fasteners included)

.63

.38

3/8-16 CAP SCREW

W + 1.00 W + 1.75

Rod Clamp Mount

Alternate method for mounting (fasteners not included)

5/16-18 CAP SCREW

.93 * .63

Notes: Mounts cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

To Order: This mount uses existing through holes on the conveyor that are located 6.06” from the tail end and 8.5” or 14.5” from the drive end, depending on which gearmotor selection is chosen. This will mount the conveyor to a flat surface. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125-0116-WW* Example: 125-0116-06* Rod Clamp Mount for 6” wider conveyor *Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

To Order: 3.38

W + 1.75

1.00

.63

2.00

1.34 9/32 DIA. THRU

1.41

Drive End Mount

W + 1.13

2.06

These mounts are primarily intended to provide precise alignment when mounted to a common flat surface, or for multiple conveyors utilizing a common drive shaft. See gang drive page 41.

TYPE

PART NO.

LEFT HAND

125-0014-00

RIGHT HAND

125-0013-00

UNIVERSAL*

125-0015-00

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

To Order: 3.38

W + 1.75 .63

.94

1.34

Self-Aligning Bottom Clamp Mount

2.75

2.70 MAX.

BRACKET BY CUSTOMER 3/8 MAX. THICKNESS

For applications where rapid alignment and rigid mounting of conveyors is required. These clamp mounts provide an economical and practical approach to rapid bolster mounting of gang driven conveyors. See gang drives pg. 41.

TYPE

PART NO.

LEFT HAND

125-0103-BL

RIGHT HAND

125-0102-BR

UNIVERSAL*

125-0117-BU

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

To Order: For applications where rapid alignment and rigid mounting of conveyors is required. These clamp mounts are ideal for quick die change systems since the conveyors can be installed into the dies prior to being inserted into the press. See gang drives pg. 41.

BRACKET BY CUSTOMER 3/8 MAX. THICKNESS

1.34

2.75

2.70 MAX.

.94

Self-Aligning Top Clamp Mount

3.38

.63 W + 1.75

TYPE

PART NO.

LEFT HAND

125-0102-TL

RIGHT HAND

125-0103-TR

UNIVERSAL*

125-0117-TU

*This mount replaces either right hand or left hand mount and allows mounting of a side drive.

Notes: Mounts can only be used with a side or remote drive. Mounts cannot be used with cleated belts.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Stands NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33

H1 - H2

H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60

WW -

Part No. 0182 -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section. NOTE: No additional mounts are required.

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) 02

To order:

NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches Example: 0182 - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)

Steel Telescoping Conveyor Stands To order: WW

Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 - H2 16 - 24 23 - 36 35 - 48 47 - 60

H1 - H2

WW -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter top plate width into WW section. NOTE: Mounts are required to attach the conveyor to the stand. See mount pages 26 & 27 for details

Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches) 08

Part No. 0184 -

NOTE: 8” wide top plate will accept up to a 6” wide conveyor 14” wide top plate will accept up to a 12” wide conveyor 21” wide top plate will accept up to an 18” wide conveyor 27” wide top plate will accept up to a 24” wide conveyor Example: 0184 - 16 - 24 - 14 (Part No. includes one stand)

Steel Stands with Stabilizers To order:

Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 - H2 18 - 26 25 - 38 37 - 50 49 - 62

H1- H2

WW -

0186 -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter top plate width into WW section. NOTE: Must use Rod Clamp Mount 125-0016-WW (See page 27) to attach the conveyor to the stand.

Top Plate Widths - WW (in inches)

48”

Part No.

Note: Max conveyor length is 60”

Aluminum Multiple Conveyor Stands To order:

H1 - H2 (in inches) 27 33 39 45 51 57

H1- H2

Part No. 0187 -

WW -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. 2) Choose stand width (WW) and enter into WW section.

30 36 42 48 54 60

NOTE: Conveyor will add 1.89” to top of belt height NOTE: Adjustable side mounts are required to attach the conveyors to the stand. Use Part No. 125-0181-05

Widths - WW* (in inches) Stand Widths - WW (in inches) 12

NOTE: *Stand width must be at least 4” greater than the width of the top tier conveyor and/or at least 8” greater than the width of the bottom tier conveyor NOTE: Bottom conveyors can be adjusted within 5” from the floor to within 8” of the top conveyor Example: 0187 - 33 - 36 - 12 (Part No. includes one stand)

NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Angle Brace

To order: Part No. 125-0189-00 For use with aluminum stands only. Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height of 28”. The angle brace is designed for conveyors 5’ or longer. When used with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Part number denotes a set; order (1) per stand.

Aluminum Cross Ties

To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”

024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Part No. 125 - 0235 -

LLL

Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations. Example: 125-0235-120

Steel Cross Ties

To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths LLL Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”

024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Casters

Part No. 125 - 0236 -

LLL

Swivel-In Tee Nut

To order: Part No. 125-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand

To order: Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)

Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall.

The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes. 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is provided for attaching accessories

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Drives Drive Sizing Technical Data The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 10, 14, and 18). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute) and service factor (determined below). The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 10, 14, or 18). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (33 or 37), and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 37), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF)

Service Class (I or II)

Select a service class:

Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive Class II - Moderate loads with timing belt and pulley Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 30-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) Divide the drive train torque (DTT) from #2 by the service factor (SF) from #3. This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

Service Factor - Chart 30-A 5. Determine Functionality Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8

Service Factor

Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1 (the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > RCDT. If not, then: A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

2.3

2.0

1.8

1.6

2.2

1.9

1.7

1.5

2.1

1.8

1.6

1.4

2.0

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.9

1.6

1.4

1.2

1.8

1.5

1.3

1.1

1.7 1.4 1.0 1.2 Starts and Stops per Hour

Class II

Class I

Example:

Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page) 100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 33 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT)

Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 37 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)

RCDT = 17 SDTT = 22

RCDT = 50.0 SDTT = 51.1

20 7 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

100

How to Use the Following Pages The following pages contain information on types and locations of available QC drives, presented in a clear, concise manner. Simply follow the two-page spread from left to right, and note the steps listed here.

Mounting Arrangement

Drive locations

Drawings

Sizing information

Voltage

Step 1:

Step 3

Step 5

Choose mounting arrangement & location

125 Series Standard Duty Drives Standard Duty Electric

Side or Remote Drive Side Drive

Fixed Speed

3.54 .50 5.57

3.50

.84

.16

4.00

.38

Front View

Top View

Sizing Information

Example: M1-S3SE

Motor Information*

Example: 051-025

FPM

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47 5.89 5.89

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

*A from drawing

125 Series

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and gearmotor ordering 1 3 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

2.50

Step 2:

Variable Speed

Step 1

Remote Drive O

4.88

.28

4.00

5.57 2.00

4.25 .27

1.31

.75 3.50

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-R1SE

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

3.08 1.26

Motor Information

Torque (DTT) inch Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Voltage

AMP

2.5 - 5.0

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

6.0 - 12.0

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

10 - 20

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

12 - 24

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

17 - 34

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

24.5 - 49

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

SE-

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

7.16 7.16 7.16

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)

If top or bottom drive mounting arrangement, choose timing belt or chain drive

Example: 05V-018

FPM*

*A from drawing

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)

Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is timing belt driven, and the bottom row is chain driven

Top or Bottom Drive Top Drive A + .31

3.50 9.50 3.39

5.61 3.50

.38 1.75

Front View

Top View

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the right for mounting package 1 3 and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Fixed Speed

FPM* 4.5 11 18 22 30 44

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 88 (belt) 88(chain) 76 (belt) 76 (chain) 50 (belt) 50 (chain) 41 (belt) 41 (chain) 33 (belt) 33 (chain) 23 (belt) 23 (chain)

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH

25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Example: 051-025 Ratio Prefix Voltage

Motor Information* HP

Voltage

AMP

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

5.79 5.79 *A from drawing

Variable Speed

Bottom Drive .33

1.75

3.25

9.50

5.61

3.50 .38 A

Front View

Top View

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Motor Part Number

FPM* 2.5 - 5.0 6.0 - 12.0 10 - 20 12 - 24 17 - 34 24.5 - 49

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

77 77 40 40 27 27 22 22 17 17 12 12

(belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain) (belt) (chain)

Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M1CH 10 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M110 CH 10 25 5M 25 1 or 3 SET or B M1CH 10 10

Example: 05V-012 Ratio Prefix Voltage

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Notes:

QC Industries

Voltage

AMP

V-

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

6.45

V-

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

6.45

See Drive Accessory Page for optional cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

Step 3: Choose speed

*A from drawing

Motor Part No. Example: 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)

1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x) 2. Above gearmotors are not UL, CSA, or CE approved 3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

513.753.6000

Motor Information*

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

513.753.6000

Step 4: Step 4 Speed

Mounting

(p. 30)

Voltage

Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 30

Step 5: Fixed Speed Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt

Example: 051-025 Ratio Prefix Voltage

Sizing Information FPM* 4.5 11 18 22 30 44

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 88 (belt) 88(chain) 76 (belt) 76 (chain) 50 (belt) 50 (chain) 41 (belt) 41 (chain) 33 (belt) 33 (chain) 23 (belt) 23 (chain)

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Variable Speed

Torque

Choose voltage requirements

Step 6

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH

25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Motor Information* Voltage

AMP

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

Step 6:

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

6.47

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

5.79

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

*See Drive Location Chart

5.79 *A from drawing

Step 2

Gear Reducer

Horsepower

Sprocket/Timing Pulley Combinations

QC Industries

Voltage Key 1

115VAC 1 PH

230/460 VAC 3 PH

90 VDC w/controller

90 VDC w/o controller

513.753.6000

125 Series Standard Duty Drives

Side Drive

2.56

3.54 .50 5.57

3.50

.16

.84

.38

4.00

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

Remote Drive Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

3.08 .28 DIA.

1.26

4.88

4.00

5.57 2.00

4.25 .27

1.31

.75 3.50

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

Top Drive A + .31 * 3.50 9.50

5.61 3.39 ** 3.50

.38 1.75

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21

Bottom Drive .33

1.75

3.00

9.50

5.61 3.50 3.50 .38 A + .31 *

Front View *For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table on next page

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Top View

Standard Duty Electric

Side or Remote Drive Fixed Speed Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S3SE

Example: 051-025

Motor Information*

FPM*

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

5.79

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

5.79

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*A from drawing

Variable Speed Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-R1SE

Example: 05V-018

Motor Information

FPM*

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

AMP

2.5 - 5.0

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

6 - 12

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

10 - 20

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

12 - 24

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

17 - 34

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

6.45

24.5 - 49

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

V-

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Voltage

6.45

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE (Side Drive Mounting)

*A from drawing

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@4.5 FPM)

Top or Bottom Drive Fixed Speed Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt

Example: 051-025 Prefix Voltage Ratio

Sizing Information FPM*

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

4.5

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

M1-

T or B

1 or 3

SE-

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH 5M CH

25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10 25 10

Motor Information* HP

Voltage

AMP

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

6.47

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

5.79

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

*See Drive Location Chart

5.79 *A from drawing

Variable Speed Sizing Information FPM*

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

2.5 - 5.0

6 - 12

10 - 20

12 - 24

17 - 34

24.5 - 49

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Notes:

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1 or 3 SEM1T or B CH 10 10

Example: 05V-012 Prefix Voltage Ratio

Motor Information* HP

Voltage

AMP

V-

120

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

050

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

030

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

025

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

7.16

V-

018

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

6.45

V-

012

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

6.45

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

*A from drawing

Motor Part No. Example: 05V-050 (115v 1PH Gearmotor@6 TO 12 FPM)

1. Speeds can be reduced to 1/10 of their stated speed and provides 88 inch lbs. of torque by using a decimal reducer (Part No. 125-0205-10x) 2. Fixed speed motors are UL, cUL, and CE approved; however, the variable speed motor is not 3. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

See Drive Accessory Page (Page 39) for standard duty cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Pneumatic Drives

Side Drive Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for mounting Drive Location package and gearmotor ordering information. The 1 3 box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

.72

8.59

.50 5.17

2.93 .31

.38

Front View

Top View 1

Remote Drive 5.93

.28 DIA.

2.94

4.25

5.23 2.00 .75

.50

3.50

1.31

Front View

Top View

4.88

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 3 1 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

Top Drive

5.12 9.50 2.93 *

3.50 .38

6.31 1.75

Front View

Top View

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

Bottom Drive .33

2.56 9.50

3.50 5.12 .38

1.75

6.31

Front View

Top View

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor inline with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for mounting package and 1 3 gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Pneumatic Side or Remote Drive

Sizing Information

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3SA

Motor Information

Example: 30A-015

FPM*

Torque In. Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Vane

Max PSI

14-144

See Chart Below

M1-

S or R

1 or 3

A-

015

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SA Top Drive Mounting Package with Chain

Motor Part No. Example: 30A-015 4 Vane Reversible Pnuematic Motor

2.10

2.00 100

1.59

1/4-18 NPT

120

1/4-18 NPT

140

1.00

160

1/4-18 NPT

3.42

.88 HEX 3.21

Needle Valve Part Number: 125-0034-VLV1 The QC Industries Needle Valve acts as a throttling device, and is sized to incrementally control the speed of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive

Filter, Regulator, Lubricator Part Number: 125-0034-FRL The QC Industries Filter, Regulator, and Lubricator has been sized to handle the flow and pressure requirements of the Standard Duty Pneumatic Drive

Typical Arrangement

Top or Bottom Drive Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information FPM*

Torque In. Lbs.

14-144

See Chart See Chart

Motor Part No.

Prefix Mounting Position* M1-

T or B

1 or 3

Suffix SA-

Motor Information

Example: 30A-015

Example: M1-T1SA-5M2525 Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 CH 10 10

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Vane

Max PSI

A-

015

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SA-CH1010 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Chain)

Motor Part No. Example: 30A-015 (4 Vane Reversible Pneumatic Motor)

Air Consumption vs. Speed

Torque vs. Speed 24

100 80 P

80 CFM (Free Air) Consumption

60 P

Torque Lbs. In.

40 PS

20 PSI

40 P

20 PSI

0 0

108

144

Speed - FPM (Output)

108

144

Speed - FPM (Output)

Notes: 1. Motor comes standard with muffler and in-line filter. 2. Speed should be controlled on the exhaust of air to preserve maximum torque output and a stable speed control. 3. Max speed is 61 FPM @ 80 PSI. 4. Both chain and timing belt drives have the same torque rating.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Heavy Duty Drives

Side Drive B DIA.* 4.14

B DIA. *

.48 A*

1.77

1.34 .87

Front View

3.89

Top View

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-G

Remote Drive

B DIA. *

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 3-J 1-G right for mounting package and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA. * A*

2.75

.44 DIA. .50 DIA.

1.74 2.88

3.75

1.12 2.88

Front View Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below gear box mounting plate and may require shimming

Top View

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-J

Top Drive B DIA.*

1.86

B DIA. *

A* 9.50

5.68 ** 3.50

1.37

1.75

.38

Front View

Top View

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-J mounting package and 3-G gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Bottom Drive

1.75

B DIA.*

.33

9.50

5.30

3.50

1.37

B DIA. *

1.86

.38

Front View

Top View

The motor can be rotated in 90O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-G mounting package and 3-J gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-G

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 20-21.

3-J

Motor Dimension Chart 161

163

16V

251

253

25V

331

333

33V

501

503

50V 503 (ID)

A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20

5.01 6.15

6.19

4.98

7.23

Heavy Duty Electric

Fixed or Variable Speed Side Drive Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

FPM* 12

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

15 20

Motor Information

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S1J0

Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp

DC Amp

Face

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

Example: 161 - 50J Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox Hand 16 1,3,V,D50 G or J

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

M1-

1J or 3G

128

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

132

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

130

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

120

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0

4.8

56C

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Remote Drive Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-R1G0 Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

132

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

130

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

120

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0

4.8

56C

Sizing Information

30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225

Face

128

Top or Bottom Drive

DC Amp

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)

115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Voltage Gearbox Hand

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

FPM*

Motor Information

Example: 251-20G

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 95 (belt) 120 (chain) 95 (belt) 128 (chain) 98 (belt) 132 (chain) 93 (belt) 130 (chain) 89 (belt) 128 (chain 87 (belt) 107 (chain) 84 (belt) 107 (chain) 89 (belt) 100 (chain) 67 (belt) 67 (chain) 82 (belt) 82 (chain) 68 (belt) 68 (chain) 59 (belt) 59 (chain) 51 (belt) 51 (chain) 46 (belt) 46 (chain)

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

Voltage Key 1 3 V D

Fixed or Variable Speed Mounting Part Number Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 18

115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

For optional AC controls, see p. 38 For optional AC controls, see p. 38 See controller on p. 38 Customer to supply controller

Motor Information

Motor Part No.

Voltage

Example: 503-05J Ratio

Gearbox Hand

DC Amp 1.7

1,3,V,D-

G or J

115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

Prefix Voltage

Face 42C

*See Drive Location chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

Notes: 1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460VAC 3ph motors only. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 38 & 39) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

125 Series Drive Accessories Motor Controls 6.00

Specifications/Features:

5.00 3X .19 DIA.

8.00

5.00

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09*

1.25

3.45

Standard DC Control

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

*Includes 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to AC plug and 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.50

2X .88 DIA.

115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1/2 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 1 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 1 Enclosure Forward/Reverse switch, Run/Brake switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

4.45

2.84 2.40

4.57

5.13

5.73

.34

4X .18 DIA.

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1/3 phase, 50/60 hz input, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc/CE IP 20 Enclosure 3-digit LED display Forward/Reverse switch Run/Stop button, Accel/Decel buttons Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number:* 125-0054-5C-11-05 125-0054-5C-21-05 125-0054-5C-23-20 125-0054-5C-43-10

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown DC Control

2.20

115 V AC, 1 phase input, 90 V DC, 1 hp max output 230 V AC, 1 phase input, 180 V DC, 2 hp max output 30:1 speed range UL/ULc/CE NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Forward/Off/Reverse switch Min/Max & Accel/Decel settings

NEMA 4X DC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

NEMA 4X AC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Motion Controls .25 DIA.

The Motor Starter is an overload protection that also provides a means of using a Remote E-Stop for safety. The starter is equipped with an undervoltage trip to protect against autostarting after the overload condition has been corrected. Also includes short circuit protection.

3.63

5.13

5.75 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure

2.00 .72

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

The E-Stop accessory is mounted directly to the Motor Starter enclosure, providing a means of stopping the motor for safety. It can be padlocked for servicing, and contains a start button for restarting the motor after the pushbutton has been released.

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 3.13

2.50

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated

2.25

Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061

E-Stop Accessory Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

2X .22 DIA.

3.00

2.37

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure

2.89

2.67

E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

The Remote E-Stop provides a means for locking out power to the motor for safety. It includes an IP65 enclosure and mounting bracket to allow the E-Stop to be mounted directly to the side of the conveyor frame.

3.50

2.75

To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

3.76

Remote E-Stop

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

E-Stop with enclosure

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Standard Duty Motor Options

Heavy Duty Motor Options

Part Number

Description

Part Number

Description

125-0149-01

Fixed speed standard duty electric motor ON/OFF switch

125-0149-05

ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-02

Fixed speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSE switch

125-0149-06

FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-03

Variable speed standard duty electric motor FORWARD/REVERSEswitch

125-0149-07

8’ cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-04

Fixed speed standard duty electric motor 8’ cord and plug

125-0149-09

8’ cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Drive Accessories

Double Universal Joint 4.88 MAX

1/8 KEYWAY

1.40

1.69

3.25

2X 11/32 HOLES

The Double Universal Joint with bearing mount is used to couple a remote mounted motor with a conveyor drive shaft when there is not common shaft alignment. This assembly should be used with Drive End Mounts.

2.50

0.6 2.75

.50 DIA. BORE

1.34

1.50

1.00 DIA.

0.75 MAX

1/2 HEX

1.09

Part No. 125-0148-00 (with bearing mount) Part No. 125-0148-03 (without bearing mount)

Note: Torque rating of universal joint at average angle of 15O (.375 offset) and 350 rpm is 125 inch lbs. Higher speeds and angle will reduce rating.

CAUTION: Universal joint must be guarded. (Guarding is the responsibility of the end user.)

Single Piece Flex Coupling 2.50

Part Number

1.62

*Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

125-0009-02 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter

100

125-0009-03 .5 in. diameter w/keyway

.5 in. hex

100

125-0009-06

.5 in. hex

100

.5 in. hex

The Single Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors.

*Value based on non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 5O.

Three Piece Flex Coupling B

*Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

125-0135-00 .5 in. diameter w/keyway

.5 in. hex

114

125-0135-01 .625 in. diameter w/keyway

.5 in. hex

114

.5 in. hex

114

Part Number

2.0

1.37 A

B 1.06 DIA.

125-0135-02 .97 DIA.

.5 in. hex

125-0135-07 .5 in. diameter .5 in. diameter

1/2â&#x20AC;? Hex Shaft Retaining Collar Part No. 125-0078-026

The Three Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors. This coupling is used on all side drives. Note: Use of the three piece flex coupling may require the 1/2â&#x20AC;? hex shaft retaining collar (Part No. 125-0078-026) to prevent separation. Please consult factory.

114

*Value based on standard duty non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 1O. For heavy duty applications, divide torque by 2.

Drive Extension Shaft Support Block

Drive Extension Shaft

3.25 2.50

LE NG

2X 11/32 HOLES

Length

Part No.

23 in.

125-0005-23

35 in.

125-0005-35

47 in.

125-0005-47

59 in.

125-0005-59

71 in.

125-0005-71

83 in.

125-0005-83

95 in.

125-0005-95

QC Industries

1/2 HEX 7/ 8

1/2 2.75

1 1/ 4

1.34 1/2 HEX

Part No. 125-0148-05 The Drive Extension Shaft can be used to gang drive multiple conveyors and/or for power take-off of remote drives.

513.753.6000

The Drive Extension Shaft Support Block is used to support lengths of shaft not supported by the drive coupling or a conveyor.

Typical Gang Drive Examples Bottom Drive withTwo Flex Couplings

Note 1: 1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA 125-0009-03 125-0005-23 125-0009-03 1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA

M1-B1G0-5M2525

This typical gang drive application shows a bottom drive mounting arrangement. The couplings and drive extension shaft are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is attached has a “D” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

161-50G

Side Drive with Through Shaft & Drive End Mounts 125-0013-00 Note 2: 1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA

125-0014-00 125-0005-23 125-0013-00 1ESBH06-120-AHQ-MAA 161-50J

125-0015-00 M1-S1J0-HEX*

*Non-Standard Part Number

This typical gang drive application shows a side drive mounting arrangement. The drive end mounts are shown on page 27, and drive extension shafts are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is nearest has an “H” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

Remote Drive with Flex Couplings

Note 3:

1ESBH06-120-ASQ-MAA 125-0009-03 125-0005-23 161-50G

125-0009-03

125-0148-03 M1-R1G0

This typical gang drive application shows a remote drive mounting arrangement. The couplings and drive extension shafts are shown on the opposing page. Please note that the conveyor to which the drive is nearest has a “D” designator in the drive pulley portion of the part number.

1ESBH06-120-ADQ-MAA

How to Order

The examples above help illustrate how to assemble part numbers for typical applications. The following shows the steps needed to correctly size a gang driven application: Step One: Add up the equivalent load for each conveyor you plan to gang drive. (Using pages 10, 14, and/or 18) Step Two: Size a drive based upon the total equivalent load from Step One Step Three: Determine which type of drive arrangement you need: side, remote, top, or bottom (Using page 32, 34, or 36) Step Four: Change the drive pulley digit of the conveyor part number to reflect which drive arrangement you are using. "D" for top or bottom drives and "H" for side or remote drives. Conveyor Part number example: 1ESBH04-060-ADQ-MAA - The "D" designates a dual output drive pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a top or bottom drive. The “H” designates a hex input pulley to be used in a gang driven application using a side or remote drive. Step Five: Determine the couplings and drive extension shaft needed, using the above diagrams as a guide. This information can be located on the opposing page Step Six: Ensure that the couplings can handle the torque requirements of the system. Reference page 40 Please consult the factory if you have questions.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Automation Accessories Motion Detection • Compact design • Easy to retrofit into existing conveyors • Magnetic proximity sensor allows for dependable operation in harsh operating environments • Provides one pulse per tail pulley revolution

4 PIN 2 WIRE RECEPTACLE CLAMPED IN FRAME

Motion detection can be used in all applications where it is necessary to know the conveyor belt is running while other machines are operating. QC’s motion detection system monitors your conveyor and provides a “belt running” signal to your machine conrtrol system or PLC.

4 PIN 2WIRE CONNECTOR 1.00

PROX SENSOR

.86

#10-32 F.H.C.S. SPRING ALLOWS SENSOR MOVEMENT FOR QUICK BELT CHANGE .63

.54

.06

.75

6.06

.63 .60

1 2

4 3

1 2 3 4

BROWN (+) N/A BLUE (-) N/A

PIN CONFIGURATION

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

Part No. 125-0335-02 125-0335-03 125-0335-04 125-0335-06 125-0335-08 125-0335-10 125-0335-12 125-0335-18 125-0335-24

Includes: (1) 4-pin two wire male connector (1) 4-pin two wire female connector (1) Mounting block and spring assembly (1) Mounting hardware kit (1) Template for mounting hole transfer (1) Detectable tail assembly (1) Proximity sensor Note: This kit can only be ordered for installation of motion detection into an existing conveyor in the field

Operating Temperature: -25O to +70OC (-13OF to +158OF)

Installed Motion Detection Kit

Motion Detection Retrofit Kit Conveyor Width

Electrical Specifications: Supply Voltage - 24 VDC Load Current - 200 mA, normally open

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0340-02 125-0340-03 125-0340-04 125-0340-06 125-0340-08 125-0340-10 125-0340-12 125-0340-18 125-0340-24

Note: Holes to be drilled in the field by the customer.

Includes: (1) 4-pin two wire male connector (1) 4-pin two wire female connector (1) Mounting block and spring assembly (1) Mounting hardware kit (1) Detectable tail assembly exchanged for the standard tail assembly (1) Proximity sensor (1) Installation of sensor kit into conveyor Note: This kit can only be ordered with the purchase of a new conveyor Note: Please denote a “D” in the tail pulley portion of conveyor part number

Drip Pans

1/2-14 NPT

Part No. 125-0403-

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features: Attaches to standard width and length conveyors, and is ideal for recapturing oils and lubricants. Note: Designed for use with fixed side rails that use side rail clamps and the universal adjustable side mount only. To Order: Fill in the last five digits of the part number with the width and length of the conveyor it is to be used on. Part No. 125-0403-WW-LLL

Automation Accessories Inline Transfer Plate

90O Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0230-02 125-0230-03 125-0230-04 125-0230-06 125-0230-08 125-0230-10 125-0230-12 125-0230-18 125-0230-24

Notes: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Discharge conveyor must be pushing. Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.

Pivot Mount Set

Custom Rolling Nosebars Note:

Note:

The pivot mount attaches to the tail end of the conveyor and enables a pivot point from which other devices can lift the conveyor. Includes left and right hand mount.

The rolling nosebar can be used with a conveyor running less than 60 fpm and carrying less than 5 lbs. per inch of conveyor width.

To Order: Please denote an ‘SAF’ in the belt portion of the conveyor part number, and an ‘R’ for the tail pulley part of the conveyor part number.

To Order: Part No. 125-0172-00

Example: 1ESBH04-048-ASR-SAF

Adjustable Diverters

Adjustable Stops To Order:

Note:

1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See pages 22 -24)

The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot Example: 125-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails with wear strip

125-0232-WW 125-0234-WW 125-0233-WW To Order: Part No. 125-0250-000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors Specifications • • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm* Conveyor made from corrosion resistant components for wipe-down applications *See Technical Data on page 46

Overview Dimensions

.75

.42

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please consult factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

6.13

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

W + 2.33

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.89 *

.75 .82

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE

.88

L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel or electroless nickel plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Pulley Assembly • Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors Technical Data Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 46-A 500

A conveyor application that is accumulating a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

350

250

Lbs.

100 75 75 50 37.5 3

125

100

175

150

87.5

6 8 10 12 18 24 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Note: See page 47

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 46-B 3.0

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 46-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Four. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult the factory.

3.1

2.3

2.0

2.1 1.8

1.5

1.6 1.4

1.0

1.1 0.8

Angle Factor

0.6 0.0 0

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

Conveyor Friction - Figure 46-C 200

168 132

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor (see pages 60-65).

Equivalent Load

150

513.753.6000

3.0

0.3

If the application does not call for side rails with seals to prevent small parts from getting under the rail, enter zero on Line Four. Otherwise multiply the conveyor length in feet by 5. The side rails can be found on page 54. Example: 96" long conveyor with side seals would have a factor of 40 (8 x 5). Enter result on Line Four.

Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

2.8

2.9

2.5

0.5

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-5)

2.6

2.5

0.0

QC Industries

150

Equivalnt Load Constant

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

225

200

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 52 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter result on Line Two.

5. Conveyor Friction

250

2. Accumulation

STOP

300

100

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 46-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications. Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

4. Side Seals

400

1. Nominal Load

450

96 100

84 72

0 Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

How to Order Step 2

Step 1

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

1 E R

Step 4

Step 3

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

1 = 125

E = End Drive

R = Corrosion Resistant

E = 1.81” Stainless Steel B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - Contact factory

Step 2 Lengths*

Widths 2”

3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

36”

48”

60”

72”

96”

120” 144”

024

036

048

060

072

096

120

144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3 Drive Location C

Drive Pulley Type

D d

d an St

B A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

Cap

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Dia*

Tail Pulley Type d

Solid Output Shaft

1/2” Dia* Dual Output

d an St

Standard

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4 Choose three-digit belt ordering code on pages 52-53. Example: 1EREH03-048-ASQ-MAA 125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 3” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

Note: proceed to page 54 to continue sizing your conveyor...

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors

Specifications • • • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 24” to 144” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 450 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm* Multiple Cleat Heights Available Conveyor made from corrosion resistant components for wipe-down applications *See Technical Data on page 50

Overview Dimensions

.75

.42

6.13

W + 2.33

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W - 1.37 = CLEAT WIDTH 1.89 *

.82

CLEAT HEIGHT SEE PAGE 51

L - 2.00 = CENTER DISTANCE

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

.88

.75

L - .31 = OVERALL LENGTH

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge stainless steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Corrosion resistant construction is achieved by replacing steel components with stainless steel or electroless nickel-plated components to help prevent or minimize rust. Bearings are filled with food grade grease instead of standard grease. Anodized aluminum is used on some surfaces as well as on many of our side and guide rail profiles • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats

Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 51 Step 4 for options

Tail Assembly • Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

Drive Assembly • Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with food grade grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against offcenter load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication • Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed bearing assemblies that are piloted on body fitted studs, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors • Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley available in solid output design or dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Cleated Conveyors Technical Data

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 50-A 500 450

450 400

A conveyor application that is carrying a 5-pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 5 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the three steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque

350 300

300 Lbs.

250

250 150

150 100 50

1. Nominal Load

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 50-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry, to ensure it can carry the load. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for both drive pushing and drive pulling applications.

225

200

200 100 75 75 50 37.5 50

100

175

150

125

87.5

6 8 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 51

Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 50-B

Enter result on Line Two.

3. Conveyor Friction

2.9

3.0

3.1

2.5 2.3

2.0

2.1 1.8

1.5

1.6 1.4

1.0

1.1 0.8 0.6 0.3

0.0 Angle Factor

0.0 0

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75

0.0 0.3 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1

Conveyor Friction - Figure 50-C 200

168 132

150

Enter result on Line Three.

lbs.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-3)

Write down the equivalent load on your application assistance form (see pages 116-117). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor (see pages 60-65). Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

QC Industries

2.8

2.6

2.5

0.5

513.753.6000

Equivalent Load

STOP

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines One and Two together, please reference Figure 50-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Two. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor.

Equivalnt Load Constant

3.0

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Two. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 50-B based upon the angle of incline then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One.

96 100

84 72

0 Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

How to Order Step 2

Step 1

# of Cleats # of Cleats # of Cleats

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

1 E R

Step 5

Step 4

Step 3

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

1 = 125

E = End Drive

R = Corrosion Resistant

E = 1.81” Stainless Steel B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige)

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - Contact factory

Step 2 Lengths*

Widths 2”

3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

36”

48”

60”

72”

96”

120” 144”

024

036

048

060

072

096

120

144

*Contact factory for special lengths

Step 3 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location C

d an St

Tail Pulley Type

Cap

n io 41 pt g. 1/2” Dia* Oep se

1/2” Dia*

Solid Output Shaft

1/2” Dia* Dual Output

d an St

Standard

A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing * 1/8” sq. key included

Step 4 Choose a base belt material and cleat height Cleat Height

5mm 19mm

MAA (Standard Urethane) CAB CBB UAC (White Urethane)

CAD CBD

1/2” CAE CBE

3/4” CAF CBF

1” w/corr. sides

1”

2”

3”

CAH CBH

CAG CBG

CAI CBI

CAK CBK

Step 5 Determine the total number of cleats on the conveyor. Multiply conveyor length (in inches) by 2, divide by the desired spacing between the cleats (in inches). This will result in the total number of cleats evenly spaced around the circumference of the belt. Note: Must have a whole number of cleats. Example: 1EREH08-048-ASQ-CAE016 125 Series conveyor with corrosion resistant construction and 1.81” stainless steel frame. Conveyor measures 8” wide by 48” long with solid output pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor belt has a 1/2” high cleat every 6”.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

MAA Smooth MAB Smooth, Sealed Edge MAC Longitudinal Serrated Cleat MAD Smooth, Perforations

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane

FDA

Belt Colo r

Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho rt Te Max rm P Tem a pera rt ture Max (째F) . Tem Ambien t pera ture Operati ng (째F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )

l teria e Ma Top Surf ac

scri e De Top Surf ac

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Orde ring Cod e

ptio n

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Conveyors

White White White White

YES YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW LOW

212 212 212 212

176 176 176 176

YES YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.075 0.075

Light Grey Dark Green Beige Black Black

NO NO YES NO NO

HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH

212 212 212 194 212

176 176 176 158 176

NO YES YES YES YES

0.103 0.145 0.072 0.083 0.185

FAA FAB FAC FAD FAF

Snakeskin Matte Smooth Longitudinal Groove Rough Top

AAA AAC AAD AAE

Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES NO NO YES

VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW

212 248 140 175

176 212 140 175

YES NO YES YES

0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054

HAA HAB HAC HAD HAE

Fine Texture Fabric Smooth Coarse Structure Smooth

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Silicone Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber

White White White Blue White

NO NO YES NO NO

MED LOW MED MED MED

356 356 400 300 300

356 356 350 212 212

YES YES NO YES YES

0.059 0.051 0.085 0.079 0.067

IAA IAB IAC IAD

Smooth Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Urethane Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

Yellow White Black Black

NO YES NO NO

LOW LOW HIGH MED

230 212 248 176

194 176 212 176

YES YES YES YES

0.060 0.075 0.083 0.100

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane

White White White Translucent White

YES YES YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH

212 212 230 248 176

176 176 194 212 176

YES YES YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.055 0.047 0.050

EAA EAB EAC EAD

Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured

Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece

Black Black Black Black

NO NO NO NO

MED HIGH LOW MED

212 212 158 176

176 212 158 176

104e 104e 105e 105e

0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100

TAA TAB TAC

Textured Fabric Textured

Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES

VERY LOW 175 VERY LOW 248 VERY LOW 176

175 212 176

NO NO NO

0.023 0.024 0.040

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE

Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black

NO YES NO YES NO

MED LOW MED MED MED

158 176 212 212 212

158 176 176 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071

NAA NAB NAC NAD

Felt Fabric Fabric Felt

Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester

White White Natural White Black

YES YES YES NO

MED MED MED MED

175 175 175 302

175 175 175 248

NO NO NO YES

0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098

RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE

Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured

Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone

Beige White White White White

YES YES NO YES YES

HIGH LOW MED MED LOW

212 194 356 176 176

176 158 356 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040

SAA SAB SAC SAD SAE

Sawtooth Lateral Groove Stipple Top Textured Longitudinal Groove

PVC Nitrile Rubber PVC Urethane PVC

Green White White White Green

NO YES YES YES NO

HIGH HIGH MED MED HIGH

212 225 212 212 175

176 225 176 176 175

YES NO NO YES YES

0.177 0.210 0.106 0.078 0.175

PVC PVC Soft Silicone PVC PVC

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

contact one of our sales engineers directly at the factory to discuss your application parameters.

To Order Belt Only: Choose nominal conveyor width and length in inches and enter the three-digit belt code.

To Order With Conveyor: Please use the three-digit QC belt code number for conveyor ordering on pages 47 and 51.

1E - WW - LLL Example: 1E-08-120-MAA Standard urethane belt for an 8â&#x20AC;? wide by 120â&#x20AC;? long 125 Series conveyor

Multi-Purpose Belts

QUICK SHIP!

B FA

C FA

D FA

High-Friction Belts

A FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

Heat-Resistant Belts

Cut-Resistant Belts

FDA/USDA Belts

Static Conductive Belts

B TA

C TA

B PA

C PA

Translucent Belts

A TA Color Contrasting Belts

A PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

Release Properties Belts

Specialty/Profile Belts

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails Fixed Side Rails

W + 1.06

W - .61

W - .19

W + .06

2.22

1/3” Side Rails

.46 *

.33 *

2.35

2.22

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 125R-0153-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0169-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0170-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0169-096

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0170-024

125R-0169 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0153-048

W + 1.19

W + .06 W + .06

W - .19

W - .61 .78

.93 *

.78

.93 *

2.81

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 125R-0174-

125R-0178 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0174-048

2.03

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0177-

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0178-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0177-024 W + 1.19

W + 1.19

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0178-096

W + 1.19

W + .06

2.91

2.81 2.03

2.03

1” Side Rails

.88

1.03 *

W - .18

W - .61

1.93 *

1.78

1.93 * 3.81

2.03

2” Side Rails

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 125R-0215-

125R-0215 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0215-024

2.05 *

1.78

1.90 3.93

3.81 2.03

2.03

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with seals** Part No. 125R-0217-

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 125R-0216-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0217-036

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Ex. 125R-0216-060

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see pages 52-53 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets ** Side seals are not intended for cleated belts, high friction belts, or belt speeds exceeding 30 FPM Note 3: Side rails start 1 11/16” from tail end and stop 3 1/2” from drive end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails W - .10 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. *

W - .25 MAX.

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX

W + 9.12 MAX. 1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125R-0281-

2-Axis Adjustable Guides 125R-0281-048-T pictured

2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 125R-0282-

W - .38 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

Example 125R-0281-120-T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No.125R-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42

W - 1.21

W - 1.21 2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 3.94

3.28

1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. *

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0219-

Indented Guides

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0218-

125R-0219 pictured

W + 1.57 W - 1.31

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Example 125R-0219-120 1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor

3.03 * 4.92

The Indented Guides are designed to work with cleated belts. Each cleated belt is indented slightly (see page 51). The Indented Guide spans the indentation, providing a pocket which surrounds the product being conveyed. 3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No.125R-0222*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Side & Guide Rails Tee Slotted Extrusions 10-32 UNF THRU

To Order: Use part number 125R-0074-035 (Qty. 1) 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty. 4)

.25

The Rotate-In Tee Nut is designed to hold lightweight brackets that have a thickness of .148” or under

.19 .86

The Rotate-In Tee Nut can be used with the following rails: 1” - 125R-0174, 125R-0177, 125R-0178 2” - 125R-0215, 125R-0217, 125R-0216

Rotate-In Tee Nut Part No. 125R-0074-035 (Qty 1) Part No. 125R-0074-035-SET (Qty 4)

Rotate-In Tee Nut

Tee-125R-0225, 125R-0199

125R-0074 pictured

Note: The Rotate-In Tee Nut works with the 1” and 2” side rails, as well as the Single Tee Slot extrusion and the Multi Tee Slot extrusion.

W + 2.68

W + 1.28

W + 1.50

.73 *

1.16

1.16 Multi Tee-Slot Side Assembly Part No.125R-0225-

Multi Tee Slot

Single Tee-Slot Side Assembly Part No. 125R-0199-

Single Tee Slot

To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

*Dimensions reflect use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

To Order: Fill in last three digits of part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches. Part number includes one set as shown in drawing.

Product Containment Accessories

LANES Custom Sides Available RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3" RAILS

Lane Dividers

A number of other side options exist to meet the demands of a wide variety of applications. Please call our factory for details.

Lane Dividers For part number see below

To Order:

Construction (R - Corrosion Resistant) Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc) Conveyor Length (in inches) Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Example LD-2-08144-12FR 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

Flared Side Rails Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The rails attach to and require the use of the adjustable guide rails shown at the top of page 55. Additionally, the user can add other components (shown below) to help guide the product as needed. Note: Flared Side Rails should be ordered one size smaller than the nominal length of the conveyor.

W + 10.35 MAX. W + 4.41 MIN. 45°

W + 4.97 MAX. W - .97 MIN.

4.00

Flared Side Rails

To Order: Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048

Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide (sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL

.25

5.74 MAX. * 4.93 MIN. *

12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48”

length length length length length length length

Example: (1) Z-1004-036 A set of 36” long flared side rails

The rails are sold in sets and include mounting hardware Note: Requires Part #125-0282-LLL shown on page 55 L = length of flared side rails

2.90 .90

2.35 *

To Order: 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

125-0234-08 125-0234-10 125-0234-12 125-0234-18 125-0234-24

Example: (1) 125-0234-10 One end stop for a 10” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

End Stops Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125R-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

L L - 4.20 MAX. L - 5.80 MAX.

2.35 *

The Adjustable Hopper is used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rail. The hopper is made from (2) end stops, which are adjustable down the length of the rail. Available for the following width conveyors: 8”, 10” 12” 18”, and 24”. To Order: Please order a quantity of 2: 8” 125-0234-08 10” 125-0234-10 12” 125-0234-12 18” 125-0234-18 24” 125-0234-24 Example: (2) 125-0234-18 Two end stops for an 18” wide conveyor equipped with flared side rails

Adjustable Hopper

Note: Designed to be compatible with 1” and 2” cleats. End stops are equipped with a swing gate to help contain product

L = length of flared side rails Note: Shown with 2-axis adjustable guide AND Flared Side Rails (both sold separately) Part # 125-0282-LLL and #Z-1004-LLL

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Mounts Standard Mounts .22 DIA. .41

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

W + 1.46

.34 DIA. .59

1.15

.88

1.32

.31

.13

3.06

.38 SLOT

2.06 ** 1.25

.135

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

3.50

Universal Adjustable Side Mount

Part No. 125R-0181-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125R-0181-04 (Frame)* Part No. 125R-0181-05 (For use with multi-tier stand)*

125R-0181-04 pictured

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Frame mounted brackets can only be used with 1” high or lower cleats. T-Slot mounted brackets can only be used with 1/2” high or lower cleats.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

W + 1.46

.34 DIA.

.22 DIA.

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

.59

1.53

.88

.13

.31

3.10

5.28 **

4.81

3.07

.38 SLOT

Universal Raised Side Mount

1.25

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

.135

3.50

125R-0182-04 pictured

.93 **

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

.63

Standard method for mounting to stands (fasteners included)

3/8-16 CAP SCREW

W + 1.00 W + 1.75

Rod Clamp Mount

Alternate method for mounting to stands (fasteners not included)

5/16-18 CAP SCREW

.93 ** .63

5/16-18 SET SCREW

1.25 .16

2.89 ** .43

.84

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Example: 125R-0011-04 Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor

W + 1.50 Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. This mount cannot be used with high adhesion or cleated belts.

To Order: Attaches directly to the underside of the conveyor frame. To order use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits. Part No. 125R-0011-

W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00

Universal Bottom Mount

Part No. 125R-0116-

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

11/32 DIA.

.257 DIA. THRU HOLE

To Order: This mount uses existing through holes on the conveyor that are located 6.06” from tail end and 8.5” or 14.5” from drive end. This will mount the conveyor to a flat surface. To order, use the part number below and fill in the nominal conveyor width in inches for the last two digits.

Example: 125R-0116-06* Rod clamp mount for a 6” wide conveyor

Notes: Mount cannot be used with Multi Tee or Single Tee Slotted Side Assembly Mount cannot be used with cleated belts

.63

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 54 & 56.

Part No. 125R-0182-01 (Tee Slot)* Part No. 125R-0182-04 (Frame)*

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor. Universal raised side mounts work with all cleat heights.

.38

The Tee Slot mounted version attaches to 1” siderails, 2” siderails, the single tee slot and the multi tee slot. See page 54 & 55.

Stands NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33

H1 - H2

H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60

WW -

Part No. 0182R -

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height. 2) Enter conveyor width into WW section. NOTE: No additional mounts are required.

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) 02

To order:

NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches. Example: 0182R - 30 - 33 - 24 (Part No. includes one stand)

Angle Brace

To order: Part No. 125R-0189-00 For use with aluminum stands only. Angle brace can be used on a 125 Series conveyor with a minimum top of belt height of 28”. The angle brace can replace cross ties for conveyors 5’ long and up. When used with casters, angle braces must be used on both stands. Order (1) per stand.

Stainless Steel Tubular Stand Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches)

H1 - H2 24 - 27

33 - 36

NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are included with the stand.

39 - 42 42 - 45

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) 04

2) Enter conveyor width into WW section.

36 - 39

1) Choose height range from left and enter into H1 & H2 sections. *Remember that the conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the height.

30 - 33

H1 Part No. 0188 -

27 - 30

H1 - H2

To order:

NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor.

24 Example: 0188 - 30 - 33 - 18 (Part No. includes one stand)

Casters

Swivel-In Tee Nut

To order: Part No. 125R-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand

To order:

Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall.

The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes.

Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4)

Note: Swivel-In Tee Nut is zinc plated 1/4-20 thread-in Tee Nut is provided for attaching accessories.

All applications will require theuser endtouser to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, NOTE:NOTE: All applications will require the end properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the the functionality and performance the supports depend theuser. endQC user. QC Industries aid in determining the supports your application requires. functionality and performance of the of supports depend on theon end Industries can aidcan in determining the supports your application requires.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drives Drive Sizing Technical Data The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 46 and 50). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from pages 46 or 50). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT) Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages (63 or 65), and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use a timing belt. For heavy duty drives (listed on page 65), the drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Enter Service Factor (SF) Use Chart 60-A below based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

4. Calculate Supplied Drive Train Torque (SDTT) Divide the drive train torque (DDT) by the service factor (SF). This result equals the supplied drive train torque (SDTT). Enter the result on Line Four.

Service Factor - Chart 60-A 5. Determine Functionality

A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory

Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 Service Factor

Compare Line 4 (the supplied drive train torque [SDTT]) to Line 1(the required conveyor drive torque [RCDT]). If the SDTT is equal to or greater than RCDT, then you have selected the proper drive. SDTT > RCDT. If not, then:

2.3

2.0

1.8

1.6

2.2

1.9

1.7

1.5

2.1

1.8

1.6

1.4

2.0

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.9

1.6

1.4

1.2

Starts per Hour

Factor

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

Example:

Equivalent load = 100 (per conveyor technical data page) 100 / 6 = 17 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 63 - standard duty top drive - fixed speed) 33 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a top drive) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 33 / 1.5 = 22 inch lbs. (SDTT)

Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 65 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT)

RCDT = 17 SDTT = 22

RCDT = 50.0 SDTT = 51.1

20 7 17 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

100

Mounting Arrangement

Drawings

Drive locations

Sizing information

Voltage

Step 2 125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Drives

2.50

7.20

3.59

4.35

.50

.78

3.59

.11

.38

Front View

Top View

Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S3SE-CR

Example: 051-025-WD

Motor Information

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Ratio

Suffix

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

Prefix Voltage

Step 1:

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive

Remote Drive

7.20

1.26 4.88

3.59

4.23 2.00

4.25 .23

.75

1.31

3.50

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-R1SE-CR

O / .28

Motor Information

Example: 051-018-WD

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Suffix

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Voltage

AMP

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive

Top Drive 7.51

9.50 2.88

3.50

.45 1.75

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

3.59

Choose mounting arrangement & location

125 Series Corrosion Resistant

Step 1

Step 4

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive

Side Drive

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt

Step 2:

Motor Information

Example: 051-025-WD Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Suffix

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

Choose speed

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive

Bottom Drive 1.75

.33

3.21

9.50

3.50

3.59

4.23

Front View

.42

7.51

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix

Voltage

AMP

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

Torque in Lbs.

Step 3: Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 60

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Motor Part No. Example: 051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

1. Motors are UL approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

QC Industries

Example: 051-012-WD Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix

Motor Information

4.5

FPM*

Notes:

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Gearmotors include a 6’ cord

513.753.6000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Step 4:

Step 3 Speed

Mounting

Voltage

ant

Step 5 Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt

Motor Information

Example: 051-025-WD Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

AMP

Voltage

Ratio

Suffix

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.9

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Choose voltage requirements

(p. 60)

Step 5: Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

*See Drive Location Chart

Gear Reducer

Torque

Horsepower Voltage Key

Timing Pulley Combinations

QC Industries

115VAC 1 PH

230/460 VAC 3 PH

90 VDC w/controller

90 VDC w/o controller

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Standard Duty Drives

Side Drive

7.20

2.56 3.59

4.35

.50

.64

3.59

.38

Front View

Top View

.28 DIA. 1.23

7.20

4.88 3.59 4.23 2.00 .75

4.25 .23

1.32

3.50

Front View

Top View

Top Drive 7.51

3.59 9.50 2.88 *

3.59

3.50 .45

1.75

Front View

Top View

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

Bottom Drive .33

1.75

3.21

9.50

3.50 4.23

3.59 .42

7.51

Front View

Top View

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Side Drive Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S3SE-CR

Example: 051-025-WD

Motor Information

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Ratio

Suffix

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

21 30 43

Prefix Voltage

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Remote Drive Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-R1SE-CR

Example: 051-018-WD

Motor Information

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Suffix

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Voltage

AMP

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1SE-CR (Side Drive Mounting)

Motor Part No. Example: 051-120-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor @ 4.5 FPM)

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Top Drive

FPM* 4.5

Torque in Lbs. 88

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-T1SE-5M2525-CR Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt M1-

1 or 3

SE-

Motor Information

Example: 051-025-WD Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Suffix

Voltage

AMP

-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Standard Duty Electric - Fixed Speed - Bottom Drive Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-B3SE-5M2525-CR GMtr/Sprkt Conv. Sprkt Suffix Belt Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix

Example: 051-012-WD Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix

Sizing Information FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Motor Information HP

Voltage

AMP

4.5

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

120

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

050

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

030

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

025

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

018

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

M1-

1 or 3

SE-

-CR

012

-WD

1/19

115v 1PH TENV

0.7

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Notes:

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T3SE-5M2525-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

1. Motors are UL, CSA and CE approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque

Gearmotors include a 6â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord

Motor Part No. Example: 051-050-WD (115v 1PH Gearmotor@ 6.0 TO 12.0 FPM)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Heavy Duty Drives Side Drive B DIA.

4.14

B DIA.

.48 ** A 1.77 **

1.34 .87

3.89

Top View

Front View

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted on either side of the conveyor with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the tables to the right for Drive Location mounting package and 1-J gearmotor ordering 3-G information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

3-G

Remote Drive 2.75

B DIA.

.44 DIA.

2.50 ** .85

5.72 3.75

2.88

Top View

Front View Note: 56 frame gearmotors extend below gearbox mounting plate and may require shimming

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted away from the conveyor and on either side of the conveyor, with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-G right for mounting package 3-J and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA.

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

3-J

Top Drive B DIA.

1.86

B DIA. A 9.50

5.68 ** 3.50

1.37 .38

1.75

Top View

Front View

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-J right for mounting package 3-G and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

3-G

Bottom Drive 1.75

.33 ** B DIA.

9.50

5.30

3.50

1.37

B DIA.

1.86

Top View

Front View

.37

Note: This mounting arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted below the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular with the drive pulley. Reference the drawings to the left for dimensional information. Drive Location Reference the tables to the 1-G right for mounting package 3-J and gearmotor ordering information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see Motor Information table at the bottom of the page.

3-J

Motor Dimension Chart The motor can be rotated in 90O increments to achieve alternate orientations when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and gearbox will be located.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

501

503

50V

503 (ID)

13.85

13.22

15.84

14.08

6.15

6.19

4.98

7.23

**Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 52-53.

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Side Drive Sizing Information

Motor Information

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S1J0-CR

Example: 501 - 50J-WD Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Suffix Hand G or J 50 1,3,V, D- 50 -WD

Voltage HP

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp

DC Amp

Face

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

FPM*

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

120

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

128

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V ,D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

132

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

130

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

128

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

107

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V,D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

120

M1-

1J or 3G

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed -Remote Drive Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S1J0-CR

Example: 501 - 50J-WD

Torque in Lbs.

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

120

M1-

128

M1-

132

Motor Information Voltage HP

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp

DC Amp

Face

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

1/2

8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

Gearbox Suffix Hand G or J -WD

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

1G or 3J

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

1G or 3J

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

-WD

M1-

1G or 3J

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J

130

M1-

1G or 3J

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

128

M1-

1G or 3J

0-CR

1,3,V, D-

107

M1-

1G or 3J

0-CR

120

M1-

1G or 3J

0-CR

FPM*

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Voltage Key 1 3 V D

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - Top or Bottom Drive

115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-B3J0-5M2525-CR FPM*

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs.

M1-

T or B

M1-

20 30

98 93

M1-

Motor Part No.

Motor Information

Example: 503-05J-WD

Voltage

Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand Suffix 50 1,3,V, D- 50 G or J -WD

115/230 230/460 DC Amp Amp Amp Face 1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8 56C 5

Suffix

Belt

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D- 40

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D- 30

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D- 20

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-CR

1,3,V, D- 15

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

Prefix Mounting Position*

M1-

For optional AC controls, see p. 66 For optional AC controls, see p. 66 See controller on p. 66 Customer to supply controller

GMtr. Sprkt Conv SprktSuffix

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D- 15

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

60 75

84 89

M1M1-

100

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

120

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

-CR

1,3,V, D-

G or J -WD

1/2 8.0/4.0 1.6/0.8

56C

150 175

68 59

M1M1-

200

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

225

M1-

T or B

1J, 1G, 3J or 3G

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Notes:

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025-CR (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 501-10J-WD (115V 1Ph Gearmotor@100 FPM)

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number (230 VAC 3 PH motors only) 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories (page 66) for optional controllers

513.753.6000

125 Series Corrosion Resistant Drive Accessories Drive Accessories Specifications/Features:

5.63

.188 7.20 6.35 .85

2 X .75 NPT

2.12

2.20

Washdown DC Control

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

1.20

5.63

Specifications/Features: 115/230 V AC, 1 phase, 50/60 hz input, 3 phase out, 1 hp max output 10:1 speed range (when used with ID motor) UL/ULc NEMA 4X Enclosure Speed adjustment potentiometer Run/Stop switch Carrier frequency selectable for quiet operation

.188 7.20 6.35 .85

2 X .75 NPT

2.12

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-37

2.20

Washdown AC Control

NEMA 4X DC Control

NEMA 4X AC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

1.20

Drive Shaft Extensions and Couplings

2.50

LE NG

1/2 HEX 1/2

7/ 8 1 1/ 4

Single Piece Flex Coupling

1.62

Drive Extension Shafts

125R-0009-03 couplings pictured

Length Part Number The Single Piece Flex Coupling is used to couple the remote mounted motor with the conveyor drive shaft. This coupling can also be used to couple between gang driven conveyors.

**Torque Rating (Inch Lbs.)

125R-0009-02 .5 in. dia. .5 in. dia.

125R-0009-03 .5 in. dia.

.5 hex

125R-0009-08* .5 in. dia. .472 dia.

The Drive Extension Shaft can be used to gang drive multiple conveyors and/or for power take-off of remote drives.

*For use with corrosion resistant standard duty drives only **Value based on non-reversing applications with an angular offset of up to 5O.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Part No.

23 in.

125R-0005-23

35 in.

125R-0005-35

47 in.

125R-0005-47

59 in.

125R-0005-59

71 in.

125R-0005-71

83 in.

125R-0005-83

95 in.

125R-0005-95

Automation Accessories Inline Transfer Plate

90O Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width

Part No.

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125R-0230-02 125R-0230-03 125R-0230-04 125R-0230-06 125R-0230-08 125R-0230-10 125R-0230-12 125R-0230-18 125R-0230-24

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction or cleated belts.

Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be pushing. Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate.

Pivot Mount Set Note: The pivot mount attaches to the tail end of the conveyor and enables a pivot point from which other devices can lift the conveyor. Includes left and right hand mount

To Order: Part No. 125R-0172-00

Adjustable Diverters

Adjustable Stops To Order:

Note: 1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See pages 54 & 56)

The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot Example: 125R-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails with wear strip

125R-0232-WW 125R-0234-WW 125R-0233-WW To Order: Part No. 125R-0250-000

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series

Z Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42

6.13

.75

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH .50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

QC Industries

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

C .88 B

1.89

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 2.33

513.753.6000

ANGLE°

.82 A

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Z Track • Patent-pending Z TrackTM is a unique design of the angle idler assembly that offers users a way to gain control over belt tracking at the angles of incline or decline • Z TrackTM adjusts rapidly for belt installation and tracking adjustments at the angles of incline or decline and locks in the tracking setting to ensure long-term performance • Z TrackTM components are precision manufactured and produced as a pressed, sealed-for-life assembly that is well-guarded to avoid dangerous pinch points at the angles of incline or decline

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal • Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series

L Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 36” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

W + 2.33 .50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

.88 6.13 B

QC Industries

ANGLE°

1.89

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

513.753.6000

.82 A

Features Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series

R Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 36” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple Cleat Heights Available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42

.76

6.13

W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

QC Industries

W + 2.33

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY A B ANGLE° .82 W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

513.753.6000

1.89

.88

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

Features Features &Features Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series

U Special Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42 W - .10 = BELT WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

QC Industries

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

.75

6.13 .88 1.89

.82 C

ANGLE°

ANGLE° W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 2.33

513.753.6000

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series N Special Conveyors Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 8” to 24” Length 54” to 240” Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 1.31” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 125 lbs.* Speed Range up to 225 fpm Multiple cleat heights available

*See Technical Data on page 79

Overview Dimensions

.42

.75

W - .10 BELT

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

ANGLE°

QC Industries

.50 DIA. 1/8 SQ. KEY

1.00 SHAFT LENGTH

ANGLE°

1.89

6.13

.82

C .88

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 2.33

513.753.6000

Features & Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • Fixed angles ranging from 30O to 90O minimize the number of required components, reducing costs as well as providing an industry best load carrying capacity • High tensile strength cleated belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in various styles and heights. Cleats are always high frequency welded to customer desired spacing and never glued to the top surface of the belt • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Corrugated sides available with 1 inch cleats • Multiple cleat sizes and styles available See page 81 Step 5 for options

Tail Assembly

Drive Assembly

• Single point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Straight knurl design used to prevent premature wear on the carcass of the belt and still provide superior grip to overcome start-up inertia • Crowned sealed drive assembly designed to promote superior belt tracking, and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the drive assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions • Discreet needle fitting lubrication points in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler end of the conveyor

• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal

QC Industries

513.753.6000

• Drive pulley is available in solid output design and dual output design

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Conveyors Pages 78 through 81 should be used to size, select, and compile a part number. Please use the steps below to begin the process

Selecting the Frame Arrangement

See steps below

Consult Factory

Example 1b

Choose an infeed height

12”

Choose an infeed length (if Z or L) in 6” increments

24”

Choose a discharge height

48”

Choose a discharge length (if Z or R) in 6” increments

18”

Determine rise (the difference between the discharge and infeed heights) in inches

48” -12” 36”

36”

45O

2a - 1a

Select the angle and enter the constant from the table below 4

Angle

30O 45O

60O 75O

Constant (K)

.87

.97

90O 1

(36 / .7) + 2 = 53.4 (Round up to a 6” increment)

Determine the last frame section length

(Rise/K) + 2

Choose a frame length in 6” increments Recalculate discharge height

((54 - 2) * .7) + 12 = 48.4

((Step 5 - 2) * K) + 1a 2a

54”

If new height is not acceptable, choose a different length (in 6” increments) for the center frame section and recalculate. If the center frame section is changed, please check the discharge length in step 2b for proper distance.

(Revised)

48.4”

Use the values from 1b, 2b, and 5 in the length section of the conveyor part number. See page 80. To Determine the Conveyor Floor Length Run* *This section is provided to allow the user to determine the overall floor space. It is not necessary information for placing an order. c

Key a = a frame length b = b frame length c = c frame length y = rise x = run AO = angle Q = overall length

QC Industries

Example for Z

Solve for X

Solve for Q

b2 - y2

y A°

513.753.6000

For a Z: For an L: For an R:

Q = (A + X + C) - 6 Q = (A + X) - 4 Q = (B + X) -4

542 - 362

24 +40.25 +18 - 6 =76.25

= 40.25

Technical Data

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 79-A 150

All applications require certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses these parameters into a common factor called Equivalent Load. For instance, a conveyor application that is carrying a 5 lb. load up an incline is required to move a load equivalent to more than merely the 5 lbs. of product placed upon the belt. Please follow the 3 steps below to determine the Equivalent Load for your application. These results will then be used to properly size the torque requirement for the gearmotor arrangement. (pages 86-89).

135

125

120 105 90 75

Lbs.

60 45 30 15

1. Nominal Load

12 18 24 Belt Width Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Pushing (Drive Location C&D) Note: See page 81

Enter the load (in pounds) that the conveyor must carry on Line 1. Use Figure 79-A to cross-reference the load calculation with the conveyorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s load carrying capacity; drive pulling or drive pushing. Example: Product is a box weighing 2 lbs. There will be 25 boxes on the conveyor at any one time. 2 lbx x 25 = 50 lb. load. Conveyor width is 12 inches, which is capable of carrying 125 lbs. pulling. (Ref. Figure 79-A)

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 79-B 3.4

2. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

These applications utilize an incline or decline. Choose a factor from Figure 79-B based upon the angle of incline/decline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line 1 above. Enter the result on Line 2. Example: 50 lb. (nominal load) x 2.3 (45O factor) = 115 lb. load equivalent

Equivalnt Load Constant

3.5

3.1 2.8

3.0 2.5 2.0

2.3 1.6

1.5 1.0 0.5

3. Frictional Load

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be factored into the load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, either add 4 to the conveyorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s width, then multiply by 6, or simply choose the value from Figure 79-C. Enter the result on Line 3.

0.0 Angle

Factor

1.6

2.3

2.8

3.1

3.4

Conveyor Friction - Figure 79-C

Example: 4 + 12 (Conv Width) x 6 = 96 lb. load equivalent (Ref. Fig. 79-C)

200 168

SUM (1 thru 3)

lbs.

Write down the equivalent load on the application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load is needed to properly size a gearmotor for the conveyor. (Ref. Gearmotors pages 86-89) Example: 50 lbs. (Step 1) +115 lbs (Step 2) + 96 lbs (Step 3)

Equivalent Load

150

Equivalent Load

132 100

Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

132

168

50 0

261 lbs Equivalent Load Next, proceed to the next page to construct the belt part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Z Conveyors How to Order Step 2

Step 1

Step 3

Step 4

Step 6

# of Cleats

Belt

Tail Pulley

1 E S

Drive Pulley

Length

Drive Location

C Section

Length

Angle

Length

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Series

Drive Type

Construction

B Section

A Section

Step 5

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

1 = 125

E = End Drive

S = Standard

B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

Z = Z Frames R = R Frames L = L Frames

Custom colors available - contact factory

For U & N frame styles, contact factory

Step 2 B

Widths Cleat width when using side rails

Cleat width when using corrugated sidewall

Width

Order Code

A- Maximum Part Width

B - Maximum Part Width

8”

4.20”

3.56”

10”

6.20”

5.56”

12”

8.20”

7.56”

18”

12.92”

12.24”

24”

18.92”

18.24”

Note: The nominal width of the conveyor is not usable belt space. Please refer to the drawings and table to determine a width for your application. Option A shows a cleated belt with adjustable guide rails (see page 82) while option B shows a cleated belt with corrugated sidewall (see page 81)

Step 3 Lengths Frame Lengths

18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48” 54” 60” 66” 72” 78” 84” 90” 96” 102” 108” 114” 120” 126” 132”

Order Code

018 024 030 036 042 048 054 060 066 072 078 084 090 096 102 108 114 120 126 132

for a, b, and c

Angle

18”

Example Length:

Angle for AO

30O 45O 60O 75O 90O

Order Code

024C054018

45O 24”

54” y ° x Q

Note: Use the values determined on page 78. a

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Note: Total frame sections should not exceed 20’. a + b + c <=20’

How to Order (continued) Step 4 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location

Cap

an St

Tail Pulley Type

1/2” Dia*

Solid Output Shaft

1/2” Dia*

Dual Output

an St

Standard

n io 42 pt g. Oep se

Detectable

* 1/8” sq. key included

Step 5 Choose three digit belt ordering code 1/2” High Cleat

3/4” High Cleat

1” High Cleat

2” High Cleat

3” High Cleat

1” High Corrugated Sidewall with 1” High Cleat

2” High Angled Cleat

20˚ .20

.20

.75

.50

ZAE

ZAF

.20

3.00

2.00 .13

2.00

1.00 ZAG

ZAI

ZAK

ZAJ

ZAH*

*Max. incline/decline angle for corrugated sidewall 60O

Example: ZAG = 1” Cleat Height

Step 6 Determine the Number of Cleats

Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b + c) x 2) - 8 = N

Determine number of cleats N/ Desired spacing Example: 160/6= 27

Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N

Determine number of cleats N/Desired spacing

Determine endless belt length (Solve for N) ((a + b) x 2) - 4 = N

Determine number of cleats N/ Desired spacing

Example: a = 24”, b = 36”, c = 24” Cleat spacing desired = 6” Overall belt length = (24 + 36 + 24) x 2 = 168 - 8 = 160 Total # of cleats is 160/6 = 27 (rounded to nearest odd number)

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pretensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Certain conveyor lengths and configurations will ship unassembled. Accessories such as Drives, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

Order Code Example: ZAG027

Example: 1ESBZ12-024C054018-BSQ-ZAG031 125 Z Series conveyor with powder coated frame, “Z” style, 12” wide with 24” horizontal section inclining at 45O for 54”, changing to a horizontal section for 18”. Drive is located in position “B” using a standard drive pulley and standard tail pulley. Belt is a standard urethane belt with (31) 1” high cleats on approximately 6” cleat-to-cleat centers.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Adjustable Guide Rails Adjustable Guide Rails W - 3.27* W - 4.55**

The Adjustable Side Rails are used when a guide is required to run the length of the conveyor. Adjustable guide rails are available in 1”, 2”, and 3” heights. The 2” and 3” guide may be used in conjunction with the Flared Sides, End Stop and Hopper (sold separately - reference page 83).

2.50 MAX. 1.13 MIN.

To Order:

W + 2.81

2-Axis Adjustable Guides W + 5.95 For use with cleated belting without corrugated sidewall

1” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0281- (see table at right)

1” Z-0281-ZA aaa bbb ccc 2” Z-0282-ZA aaa bbb ccc 3” Z-0283-ZA aaa bbb ccc

1” Z-0281-LA aaa bbb 2” Z-0282-LA aaa bbb 3” Z-0283-LA aaa bbb

1” Z-0281-RA aaa bbb 2” Z-0282-RA aaa bbb 3” Z-0283-RA aaa bbb

* For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

W - 3.42* W - 4.70**

3.25 MAX. 1.99 MIN. 4.34

W + 2.81 W + 5.95 2” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0282- (see table at right)

* For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

Example: Z-0281-ZB0360720018 1” high guide assembly for a 30O Z style conveyor that has a 36” infeed, 72” rise, and 18” discharge

W - 3.55* W - 4.83**

Part Number Key 5.25 MAX. 3.00 MIN.

A = Angle O

4.34

B = 30 C = 45O D = 60O E = 75O F = 90O

a,b,c = Frame Sections aaa = a Section Length bbb = b Section Length ccc = c Section Length* *Not necessary for R or L conveyors

W + 2.81 W + 5.95 3” H Guide Assembly Part# Z-0283- (see table at right)

* For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

W - 4.43 * W - 5.71 **

When the end user requires a conveyor with corrugated sidewall belting and a flared side, end chute or hopper, this guide rail is needed. It provides a 2” high side rail and the necessary mounting to support the flared sides, end chutes and hopper (sold separately - reference page 83). The guiderail incorporates a 2-axis adjustment that allows raising the side rail above the corrugated sidewall, providing a precise “drop zone” into the cleat pocket. To Order:

W + .31

Infeed Guide For use with corrugated sidewall belting

QC Industries

W + 4.31 * For 8” - 12” conveyors ** For 18” - 24” conveyors

513.753.6000

Part Number: 125-0282-LLL-S*

2” high 2-Axis Adjustable Guide Rail

*The guide rail length should equal the length of the flared side rail, which is ordered separately (reference page 83). The guide rail is only required on the infeed frame a-section (reference conveyor ordering page 80).

Flared Side Rails & Hoppers W + 2.38 W + 1.10* 45°

Flared Side Rails are ideal for applications that require a “drop zone” wider than the width of the conveyor. The flared side rails attach to the 2-Axis Adjustable Guides or the Infeed Guide rails, sold separately and shown on page 82.

W - 3.42 W - 4.70 *

4.98 To Order: 2.00 MAX CLEAT HEIGHT W + .31

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

W + 1.38 W + .10* 45°

Flared Side Rails*

W - 4.44 W - 5.72*

1.00 MAX CLEAT & C.S.W. HEIGHT W + .31

length length length length length length length

Note: Flared sides must be at least 6” shorter than the frame section length

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

2.90

W + 3.75 W + 2.47 *

20°

End Stops are used in conjunction with the Flared Side Rails. Stops are adjustable down the length of the Flared Rail and include a UHMW flap to help prevent parts from dropping off the end of the conveyor.

5.06

To Order:

W - 3.50

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

W - 4.78 * W + .31 W + 2.75 W + 1.47*

3.10 20°

End Stops*

* End Stops must be mounted to flared sides as shown above. Flared sides sold separately.

12” 18” 24” 30” 36” 42” 48”

Example: (1) Z-1004-024 A set of 24” long flared side rails

5.94 *Flared Sides must be mounted to the 2-Axis Adjustable Guides sold separately on pg. 82.

Z-1004-012 Z-1004-018 Z-1004-024 Z-1004-030 Z-1004-036 Z-1004-042 Z-1004-048

Width 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

Part No. Z-0234-08 Z-0234-10 Z-0234-12 Z-0234-18 Z-0234-24

Part No.* Z-0234-CSW-08 Z-0234-CSW-10 Z-0234-CSW-12 Z-0234-CSW-18 Z-0234-CSW-24

*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW” when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewall belt material. (Belt ordering code: ZAH)

6.03

W - 4.50 W - 5.78* W + .31

*18” and 24” wide conveyors only

Hopper assemblies are created by ordering (2) End Stops. The stops can be easily placed anywhere along the length of the flared rails to create a hopper of varying size.

2.90

Example: Z-0234-12 One end stop for a conveyor without a corrugated sidewall belt

To Order: Order a quantity of (2) to make a hopper Width 8” 10” 12” 18” 24”

L 3.10

3.10

Part No. Z-0234-08 Z-0234-10 Z-0234-12 Z-0234-18 Z-0234-24

Part No.* Z-0234-CSW-08 Z-0234-CSW-10 Z-0234-CSW-12 Z-0234-CSW-18 Z-0234-CSW-24

*Note: Use the part number that contains “CSW” when your conveyor utilizes a Corrugated Sidewall belt material.

Adjustable Hopper*

Example: Z-0234-12 (Quantity: 2) Two end stops, which create a hopper for a conveyor without a corrugated sidewall belt

* Hopper must be mounted to flared sides as shown above. Flared sides sold separately.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Stands

Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights greater than 9”)

Discharge

Infeed

Infeed Stand

With Feet

Discharge Stand

Cross Tie

To Order: Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below: Infeed Stand Legend

Discharge Stand Legend Width***

Prefix

Type*

12-

2233

F or C-

24-

27-

12-

15-

2233

F or C-

27-

30-

F or C-

15-

18-

2233

F or C-

30-

33-

2233

F or C-

18-

21-

2233

F or C-

33-

36-

2233

F or C-

21-

24-

2233

F or C-

36-

39-

2233

F or C-

24-

27-

2233

F or C-

39-

42-

2233

F or C-

27-

30-

2233

F or C-

42-

45-

2233

F or C-

30-

33-

2233

F or C-

45-

48-

2233

F or C-

33-

36-

2233

F or C-

48-

51-

F or C-

36-

39-

2233

F or C-

51-

54-

F or C-

54-

57-

Prefix

Type*

2234

F or C-

2234

F or C-

2233

Low TOB** High TOB**

*Feet or Caster

**TOB = Top of Belt

***Nominal Conveyor Width

2233

Example: 2234F-12-15-10 Aluminum stand with feet for 10” wide conveyor with infeed of 12” to 15”

Low TOB** High TOB**

*Feet or Caster

**TOB = Top of Belt

Width***

WW **Nominal Conveyor Width

Example: 2233C-30-33-12 Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 30” to 33”

Note: Infeed stand legs with prefix 2234 extend beyond the conveyor framework

Aluminum Cross Ties

To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”

LLL 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Aluminum cross ties are used when infeed height is above 18”. For heights below 18”, use the Z cross brace (see page 85). Part No. 125 - 0235 -

LLL

Example: 125-0235-024

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Aluminum Stand (for infeed heights 9” or less)

Discharge

Infeed

Infeed Stand

With Caster

Discharge Stand

Z Cross Brace

To Order: Based upon the calculations performed on page 78, choose your infeed and discharge stands using the tables below: Infeed Stand Legend Prefix

Type*

2235

F or C-

2235

Discharge Stand Legend

Low TOB** High TOB**

*Feet or Caster

Width***

Prefix

Type*

2233

F or C-

15-

18-

2233

F or C-

18-

21-

**TOB = Top of Belt

2233

F or C-

21-

24-

2233

F or C-

24-

27-

2233

F or C-

27-

30-

2233

F or C-

30-

33-

2233

F or C-

33-

36-

F or C-

36-

39-

Example: 2235F-3-6 Aluminum stand with feet for any conveyor with infeed of 3” to 6”

2233 Note: Infeed stand legs extend beyond the conveyor framework

Low TOB** High TOB**

*Feet or Caster

**TOB = Top of Belt

WW ***Nominal Conveyor Width

Example: 2233C-36-39-12 Aluminum stand with caster for 12” wide conveyor with discharge of 36” to 39”

Z Cross Brace Z Cross Braces are used when the conveyor’s infeed height is below 18”. When it is above 18”, use Aluminum Cross Tie (see page 84). Y

Specifications: 1) Z and R style conveyors:

2) L style conveyors (all): L

To Order: Part Number: Z-0235-018 Z-0235-035

QC Industries

Y< = 36” (ref. drawing) Use the 18” Z Cross Brace Y > 36 and < = 54” (ref. drawing) Use the 36” Z Cross Brace Use the 18” Z Cross Brace

18” Z Cross Brace 36” Z Cross Brace

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Drives Drive Sizing Technical Data The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data page (page 79). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT)

Enter the equivalent load the drive must handle (from page 79). Divide this number by 6. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)

Choose the belt speed from page 89, and write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that if you are choosing a top or bottom drive, you may use either a timing belt or a chain. The drive train torque is lower if using a timing belt. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Select Service Class and Enter Service Factor (SF)

Service Class (I or II)

Select a service class:

Class I - Moderate loads with chain and sprocket or direct drive Class II - Moderate loads with belt and pulley Now select the service factor (SF) from Chart 86-A below based upon hours of operation per day and number of starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

Service Factor - Chart 86-A 5. Determine Functionality Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8

A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose a wider conveyor C) Consult factory

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

2.3

2.0

1.8

1.6

2.2

1.9

1.7

1.5

2.1

1.8

1.6

1.4

2.0

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.9

1.6

1.4

1.2

1.8

1.5

1.3

1.1

1.7

1.4

1.2

1.0

Starts and Stops per Hour

Class II

Class I

Example: Equivalent load = 300 (per conveyor technical data page) 300 / 6 = 50.0 (RCDT) 50 FPM (From page 89 - heavy duty bottom drive - fixed speed) 87 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) Class II (using timing belt on a bottom drive) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.7) 87 / 1.7 = 51.1 inch lbs. (SDTT) RCDT = 50.8 SDTT = 51.1 51.1 7 50.0 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

100

Mounting Arrangement

Drive locations

Drawings

Sizing information

Voltage

Step 3

125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives

Step 5

Step 1: Choose mounting arrangement & location

Heavy Duty Electric

Fixed or Variable Speed Side Drive

Side Drive B DIA.* 4.14

B DIA. *

.48 A*

1.77

1.34 .87

Front View

3.89

Top View

1-J

3-G

Example: M1-S1J0 Suffix

Prefix

DC Amp

Face

1J or 3G

1/6 3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

132

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

130

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6

1.3/6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6

1.3/6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3 7.2/3.6

1.6/8

3.5

42C

120

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2 8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0

56C

2.75

.50 DIA.

1.74 2.88

3.75

1.12 2.88

Front View

Top View

1-G

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

*See Drive Location Chart

Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

Gearbox Hand

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp

DC Amp

Face

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

132

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/6

1.7

42C

130

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

11.6/8

3.5

42C

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

56C

128

120

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3G0 (Side Drive Mounting)

9.50

5.68 ** 3.50

1.75

.38

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

1-J

FPM* 12 15 20 30 40

3-G

Bottom Drive 1.75

B DIA.*

.33

9.50

5.30

3.50

1.37

B DIA. *

1.86

.38

Front View

Top View

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right The motor can be rotated in 90 O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

QC Industries

1-G

3-J

75 100 120 150 175 200 225

161

163

16V

251

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

25V

331

333

B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20

501

33V

5.01 6.15

503 6.19

50V 503 (ID) 4.98

7.23

513.753.6000

Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is timing belt driven, and the bottom row is chain driven

Motor Information

Motor Part No.

Voltage

Example: 503-05J Ratio

Gearbox Hand

DC Amp 1.7

1,3,V,D-

G or J

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

Prefix Voltage

Face 42C

Step 3: Choose speed

*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt) 253

A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08

Voltage Key 1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 90 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 90 V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 90 D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Motor Dimension Chart

8.8/4.4 2.0/1.0

If top or bottom drive mounting arrangement, choose timing belt or chain drive

*See Drive Location Chart

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Sizing Information

Step 2:

Voltage

Example: 251-20G

Mounting

M1-

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

Top or Bottom Drive Note: This arrangement allows for the drive to be mounted above the conveyor belt, on either side of the conveyor, and with the motor perpendicular to the drive pulley. Reference the A* drawings to the left for dimensional information. Reference the Drive Location tables to the right for 1-J mounting package and 3-G gearmotor ordering 1.37 information. The box immediately left shows the possible drive positions.

B DIA.* B DIA. *

Motor Information

Prefix

FPM*

3-J

Top Drive 1.86

Remote Drive

.44 DIA.

Voltage 115/230 230/460 Amp Amp

Position*

M1-

128

Example: M1-R1G0

*42 frame motors only

Example: 161 - 50J Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V,D50 G or J

Mounting

M1-

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

Remote Drive

B DIA. *

Motor Information

Motor Part Number

Prefix

FPM*

Sizing Information

B DIA. *

Mounting Part Number

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

*For “A” dimension, see Motor Information table at right

Step 1

Sizing Information

Notes: 1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon rimmomg torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2 HP. Add an ID to the end of the motor part number for the 230/460 VAC 3 PH motors only 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

Step 4: Speed

Mounting

Run drive sizing calculations listed on Page 86

Voltage

Step 4

D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

Top or Bottom Drive Sizing Information FPM* 12 15 20 30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

(p. 86)

Fixed or Variable Speed

Step 6

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 1J, 1G, 3J M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 1J, 1G, 3J M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 18

Motor Information

Motor Part No.

Voltage

Example: 503-05J Ratio

Gearbox Hand

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

7.2/3.6

1.6/.8

3.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

8.8/4.4

2.0/1.0

56C

*See Drive Location chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Step 2

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

Notes:

Torque

Sprocket/Timing Pulley Combinations

DC Amp 1.7

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6

Prefix Voltage

Gear Reducer

Horsepower

QC Industries

Face

Step 5:

42C

Choose voltage requirements

Step 6: Put together two part numbers, drive mounting package and gearmotor, by following from left to right

Voltage Key 1

115VAC 1 PH

230/460 VAC 3 PH

90 VDC w/controller

90 VDC w/o controller

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Heavy Duty Drives

Side Drive B DIA.* 4.14

B DIA. *

.48 A*

1.77

1.34 .87

Front View

3.89

Top View

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-G

Remote Drive

B DIA. *

B DIA. * A*

2.75

.44 DIA. .50 DIA.

1.74 2.88

3.75

1.12 2.88

Front View Note: 56 frame gear motors extend below gear box mounting plate and may require shimming

Top View

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-J

Top Drive B DIA.*

1.86

B DIA. *

A* 9.50

5.68 ** 3.50

1.37

1.75

.38

Front View

Top View

1-J

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

Bottom Drive

1.75

B DIA.*

.33

9.50

5.30

3.50

1.37

B DIA. *

1.86

.38

Front View

Top View

The motor can be rotated in 90O increments when attaching it to the gearbox. This allows the user flexibility when deciding where the motor capacitor and work box will be located.

1-G

*For “A” and “B” dimensions, see table at bottom of page

3-G

**Dimension reflects top of belt

3-J

Motor Dimension Chart 161

163

16V

251

253

25V

331

333

33V

501

503

50V 503 (ID)

A 11.39 11.26 8.22 9.22 9.25 9.15 9.01 9.24 10.11 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 B 5.20 4.69 4.98 5.19 5.20 4.99 6.20 5.20

5.01 6.15

6.19

4.98

7.23

Heavy Duty Electric

Fixed or Variable Speed Side Drive Sizing Information

Mounting Part Number

Motor Information

Motor Part Number

Example: M1-S1J0

Example: 161 - 50J Prefix Voltage Ratio Gearbox Hand 16 1,3,V,D50 G or J

Voltage 115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp

DC Amp

Face

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

128

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

132

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

130

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4 4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3 5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

120

M1-

1J or 3G

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2 7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0

4.8

56C

FPM*

Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

M1-

1J or 3G

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

*See Drive Location Chart

Remote Drive Motor Part Number

Mounting Part Number

Sizing Information

Example: M1-R1G0 Prefix

Mounting

Position*

Suffix

Prefix

Voltage

Ratio

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

132

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

130

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

128

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6 1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

107

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

5.2/2.8 1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

120

M1-

1G or 3J

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7 2.1/2.0

4.8

56C

Sizing Information

30 40 50 60 75 100 120 150 175 200 225

Face

128

Top or Bottom Drive

DC Amp

*See Drive Location Chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-S3J0 (Side Drive Mounting)

115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Voltage Gearbox Hand

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 120

FPM*

Motor Information

Example: 251-20G

*Speeds vary up to +/- 4FPM

Motor Part No. Example: 253-15J (230/460v 3PH Gearmotor@40 FPM)

Voltage Key 1 3 V D

Fixed or Variable Speed Mounting Part Number Example: M1-B3J0-CH1410 Prefix Mounting Position* Suffix Belt/Chain GMtr. Sprkt Conv Sprkt 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 0T or B 1J, 1G, 3J M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 3J 0T or B 1J,or1G, M13G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 25 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 10 10 5M 30 25 1J, 1G, 3J 0T or B M1or 3G CH 12 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 1J, 1G, 3J 5M 25 40 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 25 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 10 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 30 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 12 5M 1J, 1G, 3J 25 34 M1T or B 0or 3G CH 10 14 5M 25 40 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 16 5M 25 44 M1T or B 1J, 1G, 3J 0or 3G CH 10 18

115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

For optional AC controls, see p. 90 For optional AC controls, see p. 90 See controller on p. 90 Customer to supply controller

Motor Information

Motor Part No.

Voltage

Example: 503-05J Ratio

Gearbox Hand

DC Amp 1.7

1,3,V,D-

G or J

115/230 230/460 HP Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/0.6

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/6

3.6/1.9

1.3/0.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/4

4.6/2.6

1.3/0.6

2.5

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/3

2.5/2.8

1.5/0.7

3.2

42C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

1,3,V,D-

G or J

1/2

7.4/3.7

2.1/1.0

4.8

56C

Prefix Voltage

Face 42C

*See Drive Location chart

Mounting Part Number Example: M1-T1J0-5M4025 (Top Drive Mounting Pkg w/Timing Belt)

Motor Part No. Example: 331-10J (115v 1PH Gearmotor@100 FPM)

QC Industries

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 90 & 91) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Drive Accessories Motor Controls 6.00

Specifications/Features:

5.00 3X .19 DIA.

8.00

5.00

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09*

1.25

3.45

Standard DC Control

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

*Includes 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to AC plug and 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.50

2X .88 DIA.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

4.45

2.84 2.40

4.57

5.13

5.73

.34

4X .18 DIA.

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown DC Control

2.20

NEMA 4X DC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

QC Industries

513.753.6000

NEMA 4X AC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Motion Controls .25 DIA.

3.63

5.13

5.75 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure

2.00 .72

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 3.13

2.50

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated

2.25

Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061

E-Stop Accessory Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

2X .22 DIA.

3.00

2.37

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure

2.89

2.67

E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

3.50

2.75

To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

3.76

Remote E-Stop

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

E-Stop with enclosure

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Heavy Duty Motor Options Part Number

Description

125-0149-05

ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-06

FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-07

8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-09

8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

250 Series End Drive Conveyors Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 3’ to 15’ Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 2.5” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.* Speed Range up to 360 fpm Belt is the highest point on the conveyor *See Technical Data on page 94

Overview Dimensions

.82

.42 W - .25 = BELT WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 4.95

.62 DIA. 3/16 KEY

1.38 SHAFT LENGTH

L A = (L - D)

6.19 1.89 *

4.44

1.81 FRAME 39.38

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame

Features & Benefits

Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

Tail Assembly • Multi-point belt tension is achieved through a snap-in eccentric tail assembly designed to pull through the natural elongation characteristics of the belt and provide quick and easy belt change capacity • Crowned sealed tail assembly is designed to promote excellent belt tracking and is equipped with superior needle bearings with seals that are filled with high performance grease • Thrust washers designed into the tail assembly provide axial float, which allows the assembly to move with the natural camber of the belt and protect bearings against off-center load conditions

• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler ends of the conveyor

• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal

QC Industries

513.753.6000

250 Series End Drive Conveyors Technical Data Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 94-A 700

630

600 Lbs.

500

420 350

400

Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

100 0

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 94-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24â&#x20AC;? wide conveyor, which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

175

140

175175

Conveyor Belt Width (in.) Pushing (Drive Location C&D)

Pulling (Drive Location A&B) Note: See page 95

Above load carrying capacities are for both drive pushing and pulling applications. Note: for drive pushing applications, decrease load capacity of conveyor by 1/2 (except on the 24â&#x20AC;? conveyor).

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 94-B 2.0 1.6

Equivalnt Load Constant

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.

1.5

0.8

1.0 0.6 0.5

0.3

0.0 Angle

Factor

0.3

0.6

0.8

1.1

1.4

1.6

Conveyor Friction - Figure 94-C

Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor for the conveyor.

300

272

250 Equivalent Load

lbs.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)

1.4 1.1

**Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 94-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor or consult factory.

4. Conveyor Friction

140 105 105 70 70 52.5

210

2. Accumulation

STOP

210

200

1. Nominal Load

315

280

300

224 176

200

160

150 100

104

112

128

144

50 0

Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

104

112

128

144

160

176

224

272

How to Order Step 2

Step 1

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Length

Width

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Order Code

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

2 E S

Step 4

Step 3

Step 1 Series

Drive Type

Construction

2 = 250

E = End Drive

S = Standard

Frame Style

Frame B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - Contact factory

Step 2 Widths 2” 02

Lengths* 36”

Order Code S P

48”

4”

60”

6”

72”

8”

96”

120”

12”

132”

18”

156”

24”

180”

3”

10”

*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design.

Step 3

Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location C

Tail Pulley Type

an St

Cap

*.625” Dia.

an St

Standard

Solid Output Shaft

B A&B are drive pulling C&D are drive pushing

*.625” Dia.

*.625” Dia. Dual Output

*3/16 square key included

Step 4 Choose three-digit belt code on page 100. Example: 2ESBH10-SPF120-ALQ-MAA 250 Series End Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 10” wide by 120” long with solid output drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

QC Industries

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Conveyors longer than 120” ship unassembled. Accessories such as Motors, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

513.753.6000

250 Series Center Drive Conveyors

Specifications

• • • • • • •

Width 2” to 24” Length 4’ to 28’ Profile 1.89” high Drive Pulley 2.5” Diameter Load Carrying Capacity to 630 lbs.* Speed Range up to 360 fpm Belt is highest point on conveyor

*See Technical Data on page 98

Overview Dimensions

.42

.82 W - .25 = BELT WIDTH

Note: As in all industries, technical specifications will change with technology updates. Please contact factory or see www.qcindustries.com for the most up-todate drawings.

W + .31 = FRAME WIDTH

W + 4.95

.62 DIA. 3/16 KEY

1.38 SHAFT LENGTH

L (L - D) /2

1.89 *

(L - D) /2

6.19

1.81 FRAME

4.44

54.75

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Note: Conveyors 120” and under are built using a single piece frame

Features &Features Benefits Conveyor • Low profile design provides tight product transfers and the ability to fit into space-constrained areas • Single piece 10-gauge steel framework is laser cut and formed to create a single-body frame construction, ensuring frame integrity • Tight tolerance belting and our unique snap-out sealed tail assembly provide for a quick belt change (less than 5 minutes) that is normally achieved without having to remove the drive packages or side rails • High tensile strength belts offer superior strength-to-weight ratio and are available in over 50 various types • All components in our conveyors are produced on state-of-the-art manufacturing equipment

• Grease fitting design in the tail assembly allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Grease fitting design in each bearing housing allows for lubrication of bearings while the conveyor is running, resulting in zero down time during lubrication

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the pressed tail assembly, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Precision bearing alignment is guaranteed within the drive assembly though self-aligning bearings, providing optimal conditions to move the heaviest loads in low profile conveyors

• Eccentric tracking bushing allows for single point tracking control at the idler ends of the conveyor

• Threaded tracking adjustment points provide simple responsive belt tracking that retain settings, even during belt removal

QC Industries

513.753.6000

250 Series Center Drive Conveyors Technical Data Each of the myriad of applications that exist requires certain performance characteristics from the conveyor. QC Industries has developed a sizing system that condenses all of these parameters into a common factor, namely equivalent load.

Load Carrying Capacity - Figure 98-A

A conveyor application that is accumulating a 50 pound load, for example, demands the conveyor to carry more than 50 pounds. As such, we have developed certain factors to add to the load that the conveyor needs to carry. Follow the five steps below to determine the equivalent load your application requires. The result will then be used to help choose the gear motor arrangement that will provide the correct torque.

700

Lbs.

500

210

200 100 0

70 2

105 3

175

140

Conveyor Belt Width (in.)

If the application does not have an accumulating load, enter zero on Line Two. Otherwise, multiply the nominal load times an accumulation factor. (0.2 for accumulation belts listed on page 100 and 0.3 for MAA standard urethane). Enter Accumulation Factor on Line Two.

3. Incline/Decline [Factor] x [Load] =

Some applications require an incline or decline. If the application does not require an incline or decline enter zero on Line Three. For inclining or declining applications choose a factor from Figure 98-B based upon the angle of incline, then multiply that factor by the total nominal load from Line One. The angle limit is 30 degrees. Enter result on Line Three. **Verify Load Capacity: After adding lines one through four together, please reference Figure 98-A to ensure that the conveyor width you desire will carry the sum of Lines One through Three. If the sum is greater than the load capacity listed for the width you have chosen, please choose a wider conveyor.

Incline/Decline Load Factors - Figure 98-B 2.0 Equivalnt Load Constant

2. Accumulation

4. Conveyor Friction

280

300

Enter the total load in pounds the conveyor must carry. For example, (12) cartons weighing 10 pounds each would have a total nominal load of 120 lbs. Use Figure 98-A to cross-reference the width conveyor you desire with the nominal load you need to carry. Each conveyor width listed shows a total load carrying capacity for pushing and pulling applications. The 250 conveyor can carry 35 pounds per inch of width (with the exception of a 24â&#x20AC;? wide conveyor, which can carry only 175 lbs.) Enter nominal load (in pounds) on Line One.

STOP

420 350

400

1. Nominal Load

630

600

1.6 1.5

1.4 1.1 0.8

1.0 0.6 0.5

0.3 0.0

0.0 Angle

Factor

0.0

0.3

0.6

0.8

1.1

1.4

1.6

4. Conveyor Friction - Figure 98-C

All conveyors have a certain amount of friction that must be added to the nominal load. To determine how much additional load must be factored in, add (width x 8) + 80, or simply choose the value from Figure 98-C. Enter result on Line Four.

Write down the equivalent load on your application data sheet (found in the back of the catalog). The equivalent load will be needed to properly size a gear motor for the conveyor. Next, proceed to the next page to construct the conveyor part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

272

250 Equivalent Load

lbs.

Equivalent Load (lbs) SUM (1-4)

300 224 176

200

160

150 100

104

112

128

144

50 0

Conveyor Width

Frictional Load

104

112

128

144

160

176

224

272

How to Order Step 2

Step 1

Belt Belt Belt

Tail Pulley

Length

Width

Drive Pulley

Drive Location

Order Code

Width

Frame Style

Frame

Construction

Drive Type

Series

2 C S

Step 4

Step 3

Step 1 Drive Type

Series

C = Center Drive

2 = 250

Construction

Frame

Frame Style

S = Standard

B = 1.81” Powder Coat (Beige) E = 1.81” Stainless Steel

H = Straight Frame

Custom colors available - contact factory

Step 2 Lengths* 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144” 168” 192” 240” 288” 336”

Widths 2” 02 3”

4”

6”

8”

10”

12”

18”

24”

Order S S S S S 0 0 0 0 1 1

Code P P P P P 4 6 7 9 2 4

D D D D D D D D D D D

F F F F F 8 0 2 6 0 4

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

4 6 7 9 2 4 6 7 9 2 4

8 0 2 6 0 8 0 2 6 0 4

*Contact factory for special lengths. Lengths 120” and under are a single piece frame design

Step 3 Drive Pulley Type

Drive Location

Tail Pulley Type

an St

Cap

*.625” Dia.

an St

Standard

Solid Output Shaft

*.625” Dia.

*.625” Dia. Dual Output

*3/16 square key included

Step 4 Choose three-digit belt ordering code on page 100. Example: 2CSBH18-096D096-ALQ-MAA 250 Series Center Drive conveyor with standard construction and 1.81” powder coated frame. Conveyor measures 18” wide by 240” long with solid output drive pulley and standard tail pulley. The drive output shaft is in the A position. The conveyor has a standard urethane belt.

QC Industries

As standard, we assemble the conveyor, track the pre-tensioned belt and quality check every conveyor before we ship to the customer. Conveyors longer than 120” ship unassembled. Accessories such as Motor, Stands, Mounts, and Guides are packaged separately and are shipped unassembled with the conveyor to prevent damage during shipment. Complete assembly can be provided upon request; please contact our factory for details.

513.753.6000

FDA

Belt Colo r

Top si of F de Coef ricti on ( ficient CoF ) Sho r Max t Term P Tem a pera rt ture Max (째F) . Tem Ambint pera O ture peratin g (째F) Anti -Sta tic Ave ra Thic ge Bel t knes s (in ches )

l teria e Ma Top Surf ac

scri e De Top Surf ac

Belt Selection Guide

Belt Orde ring Cod e

ptio n

250 Series Conveyors

Multi-Purpose Belts A. Standard Urethane MAA B. Option #1-Sealed Edge Standard Urethane MAB C. Option #3-Perforated Belt MAD

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Smooth, Perforations

Urethane Urethane Urethane

White White White

YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW

212 212 212

176 176 176

YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.075

High Friction Belts A. Grey Diamond Top High Adhesion B. Green High Tack PVC C. Black Lateral Grooved High Adhesion D. Black Rough Top High Adhesion

FAA FAB FAD FAF

Snakeskin Matte Longitudinal Groove Rough Top

PVC PVC Soft PVC PVC

Light Grey Dark Green Black Black

NO NO NO NO

HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH

212 212 194 212

176 176 158 176

NO YES YES YES

0.103 0.145 0.083 0.185

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction) A. White FDA Fabric Accumulator C. Black Tight Weave Accumulator D. Grey Textured Urethane Accumulator E. Green FDA Fabric Accumulator

AAA AAC AAD AAE

Fabric Fabric Textured Fabric

Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated Urethane Impregnated

White Black Light Grey Dark Green

YES NO NO YES

VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW

212 248 140 175

176 212 140 175

YES NO YES YES

0.054 0.051 0.060 0.054

Heat-Resistant Belts A. White Silicone Heat Resistor B. White Silicone Translucent Resistor C. Blue Nitrile Heat Resistor D. White Nitrile Heat Resistor

HAA HAB HAD HAE

Fine Texture Fabric Coarse Structure Smooth

Silicone Silicone Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Nitrile Rubber

White White Blue White

NO NO NO NO

MED LOW MED MED

356 356 300 300

356 356 212 212

YES YES YES YES

0.059 0.051 0.079 0.067

Cut Resistant Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Black Dimple Top Cut Resistor C. Rugged Poly Cut Resistor

IAB IAC IAD

Smooth Dimple Top Structured

Urethane Hard Urethane Nitrile Rubber

YES NO NO

LOW HIGH MED

212 248 176

176 212 176

YES YES YES

0.075 0.083 0.100

UAA UAB UAC UAD UAE

Smooth Smooth, Sealed Edge Matte Smooth Smooth

Urethane Urethane Urethane Urethane Impregnated Urethane

White White White Translucent White

YES YES YES YES YES

LOW LOW LOW MED HIGH

212 212 230 248 176

176 176 194 212 176

YES YES YES YES YES

0.075 0.075 0.055 0.047 0.050

EAA EAB EAC EAD

Textured Rough Texture Smooth Structured

Urethane Impregnated Nitrile Rubber Urethane NBR Impregnated Fleece

Black Black Black Black

NO NO NO NO

MED HIGH LOW MED

212 212 158 176

176 212 158 176

104e 104e 105e 105e

0.063 0.080 0.040 0.100

TAA TAB TAC

Textured Fabric Textured

Impregnated PU Urethane Impregnated Silicone

Light Green Translucent Translucent

YES YES YES

VERY LOW VERY LOW VERY LOW

175 248 176

175 212 176

NO NO NO

0.023 0.024 0.040

PAA PAB PAC PAD PAE

Textured Smooth Matte Matte Smooth

PVC Urethane PVC Urethane PVC

Grey Green Dark Green Light Blue Black

NO YES NO YES NO

MED LOW MED MED MED

158 176 212 212 212

158 176 176 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.060 0.050 0.075 0.063 0.071

NAA NAB NAC NAD

Felt Fabric Fabric Felt

Felt Spun Polyester Cotton Polyester

White YES White YES Natural White YES Black NO

MED MED MED MED

175 175 175 302

175 175 175 248

NO NO NO YES

0.070 0.067 0.072 0.098

RAA RAB RAC RAD RAE

Smooth Matte, Smooth Fine Texture Smooth Textured

Silicone Non-Stick PVC Silicone Habilene Silicone

Beige White White White White

YES YES NO YES YES

HIGH LOW MED MED LOW

212 194 356 176 176

176 158 356 176 176

YES YES YES YES NO

0.072 0.059 0.059 0.090 0.040

SAD

Textured

Urethane

White

YES

MED

212

176

YES

0.078

FDA Belts A. Standard Urethane B. Sealed Edge Standard Urethane C. Pure White FDA D. Woven White FDA E. White FDA Urethane High Adhesion Static Conductive Belts A. Textured Carbon Impregnated B. Accumulation Static Conductive C. Low Friction Static Conductive D. Structured Static Conductive Translucent Belts A. Green Translucent Accumulator B. FDA Fabric Translucent Accumulator C. Silicone Translucent Accumulator Color Contrasting Belts A. Gray Textured Contraster B. Smooth Green Urethane Contraster C. Dark Green PVC Contraster D. Light Blue Urethane Contraster E. Smooth Black PVC Contraster Non-Marking Belts A. Felt Topped Product Protector B. Fabric Topped Product Protector C. Cotton Topped Product Protector D. Black Elastomer Product Protector Release Properties Belts A. Beige Silicone Product Release B. White PVC Product Release C. Textured Silicone Product Release D. Smooth Habilene Product Release E. Smooth Silicone Product Release Specialty/Profile Belts A. Negative Pyramid Profile

White Black Black

100

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Specifications subject to change - consult factory

QC Industries offers conveyor belting for a

Series conveyors. If you have a specific need

To Order With Conveyor:

wide variety of applications and industries.

that is not covered on these pages, please

Please use the three-digit QC belt code

These pages cover a number of the more

contact one of our sales engineers directly at

number for conveyor ordering on pages

popular belts we have provided through the

the factory to discuss your application

95 and 99.

years. These belts have all been tested at QC

parameters.

Industries and offer a compatible fit to the 250 Multi-Purpose Belts

QUICK SHIP!

B FA

D FA

High-Friction Belts

A FA

F FA

Accumulation Belts (Low Friction)

Heat-Resistant Belts

Cut-Resistant Belts

FDA/USDA Belts

Static Conductive Belts

B TA

C TA

B PA

C PA

Translucent Belts

A TA Color Contrasting Belts

A PA

D PA

E PA

Non-Marking Belts

Release Properties Belts

Specialty/Profile Belts

QC Industries

513.753.6000

101

250 Series Side & Guide Rails Fixed Side Rails W + 1.06 W + 1.06

W - .19

W + .06

.46 *

.33 *

2.35

2.22

1/3” Side Rails 250-0153 pictured

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides Part No. 250-0153-

Aluminum extruded 1/3” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0170-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches.

Ex. 250-0153-048 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Ex. 250-0170-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)

W + 1.19

W - .19

W + .06

.88

1.03 *

.78

.93 *

2.91

2.81

2.03

1” Side Rails

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0178-

Aluminum extruded 1” high sides Part No. 250-0174-

250-0178 pictured

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches.

Ex. 250-0174-048 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Ex. 250-0178-096 (Center or End Drive Rail)

W + 1.19

W + .06

W - .18

1.93 *

2.05 *

1.78

1.90 3.93

3.81 2.03

2.03

2” Side Rails 250-0215 pictured

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides Part No. 250-0215-

Aluminum extruded 2” high sides with wear strip Part No. 250-0216-

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches.

Ex. 250-0215-024 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Ex. 250-0216-060 (Center or End Drive Rail)

Note 1: W = nominal belt width in inches * Dimension reflects use of standard urethane belt (MAA) see page 100 Note 2: All rails are sold in sets Note 3: Side Rails do not run the full length of conveyor. They are indented 1 11/16” from either end Custom fixed and flared side rails are available. For heights, consult factory

102

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Adjustable Guide Rails 3.00 ADJ.

W - .10 MAX.

3.00 ADJ.

2.50 MAX. * 1.13 MIN. *

W - .25 MAX.

3.25 MAX. * 1.99 MIN. * 4.34

W + 2.81

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX

W + 9.12 MAX.

2-Axis Adjustable Guides

2” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0282-

1” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0281-

250-0281-048-T pictured

3.00 ADJ.

W - .38 MAX.

5.25 MAX. * 3.00 MIN. * 4.34

Example 250-0281-120 -T 1” adjustable guide rail with wear strip and thumb wheel adjustment for a 120” long conveyor The 2-Axis Adjustable Guides are designed to guide the product being conveyed. The rails can adjust vertically and horizontally, offering the end user the ultimate in flexibility. Choose from a set screw or thumb wheel adjustment. The thumb wheel is shown in the above picture and is ideal for quick adjustments, because no tools are required.

W + 2.81 W + 9.12 MAX. 3” High 2-Axis Adjustable Guides Part No. 250-0283-

W + 1.57 W + 1.42

W - 1.21

W - 1.21 2.40 MAX. * 2.13 MIN. * 3.94

3.28

1.62 MAX. * 1.03 MIN. *

2” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0218-

1” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0219-

Indented Guides 250-0219 pictured

W + 1.57 W - 1.31

To Order: Fill in the last three digits of the part number with the nominal conveyor length in inches.

3.03 * 4.92

Example 250-0281-120 1” adustable guide rail with wear strip for a 120” long conveyor

3” High Indented Guide Assembly Part No. 250-0222-

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See page 100

QC Industries

513.753.6000

103

250 Series Automation Accessories

To Order: LANES

Construction (S - Standard)

RAIL CLEARANCE 2" OR 3"

Mounting Type (F - Frame or T - Tee slot) # of Lanes (2,3,4 etc) # of Rails (1, 2, 3, etc) Conveyor Length (in inches)

RAILS

Conveyor Width (in inches) Rail Clearance Height (2” or 3”)

Lane Dividers

Lane Dividers For part number see box to right

90O Transfer Plate

Example LD-2-08144-12FS 2” Lane Divider for 8” wide 144” long conveyor. One rail with two lanes mounted to the conveyor frame

Inline Transfer Plate

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0230-02 125-0230-03 125-0230-04 125-0230-06 125-0230-08 125-0230-10 125-0230-12 125-0230-18 125-0230-24

Note 1: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction belts. Note 2: Discharge conveyor must be pushing Note 3: Customer to drill screw holes to mount plate

Conveyor Width

Part No.

2 in. 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in. 18 in. 24 in.

125-0220-02 125-0220-03 125-0220-04 125-0220-06 125-0220-08 125-0220-10 125-0220-12 125-0220-18 125-0220-24

Note: Transfer plates are not intended for use with high friction belts

Adjustable Stops

Adjustable Diverters To Order: Note:

1. Select an adjustable stop for 1” sides, 2” sides, or single tee slot (See page 102)

The adjustable diverter comes with a 5’ piece of UHMW rail and (2) mounting assemblies that the user can utilize to help orient the product around a 90O transfer.

2. Using the chart below, fill in the part number using the nominal width of the conveyor for the last two digits of the part number Part No. 1” Sides 2” Sides Single Tee Slot

125-0232-WW 125-0234-WW 125-0233-WW

Example: 125-0232-04 End Stop for a 4” wide conveyor that has 1” aluminum side rails

104

QC Industries

513.753.6000

To Order: Part No. 125-0250-000

Note: These mounts are intended for surface mounting only. The 250 stands do not require a conveyor mount when ordering stands on pages 106 & 107.

Standard Mounts .22 DIA.

W + 1.46

.34 DIA.

.41

.59

1.15

.88

1.32

.31

.13

3.06

.38 SLOT

2.06 * 1.25

.135

Part No. 125-0181-04 (Frame)*

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

3.50

Universal Adjustable Side Mount

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

125-0181-04 pictured

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.

W + 1.46

.34 DIA.

.22 DIA.

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

.59

1.53

.88

.13

.31

3.10

5.28 *

4.81

3.07

To Order: Frame Mounted version attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

1.25

Part No. 125-0182-04 (Frame)* .38 SLOT

Universal Raised Side Mount

W + 1.09 MAX. W + .57 MIN. W + 1.71

.135

3.50

125-0182-04 pictured

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor.

5/16 DIA. THRU HOLE

1.00

.22

To Order: .66

2.04 *

1.60 .135

Tee Mount

Attaches directly to the conveyor frame. The frame has mounting holes every 3”.

1.56

3.00

W + 1.37

4.00

W + 2.00

Part No. 125-0010-00*

Notes: Brackets are universal and can work on either side of the conveyor and mounts the conveyor to a flat surface.

5/16-18 SET SCREW

.63

11/32 DIA.

.257 DIA. THRU HOLE 1.25 .16

2.89 * .43

.84

Example: 125-0011-04* Universal Bottom mount for a 4” wide conveyor

W + 1.50

Notes: Bottom mount can attach conveyor to a horizontal or vertical surface. Cannot be used with high adhesion belts.

*Dimension reflects use of MAA belt. See pages 100-101.

W - 1.50 W - .75 W + 1.00

Universal Bottom Mount

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

QC Industries

*Part No. denotes one bracket and necessary hardware

513.753.6000

105

250 Series Stands

NOTE: There is a 3” overall height adjustment with feet

Aluminum Exact Width Conveyor Stands To order: Stand Height Range: H1- H2 (in inches) H1 - H2 06 - 09 09 - 12 12 - 15 15 - 18 18 - 21 21 - 24 24 - 27 27 - 30 30 - 33

H1 - H2

H1 - H2 33 - 36 36 - 39 39 - 42 42 - 45 45 - 48 48 - 51 51 - 54 54 - 57 57 - 60

See the next page for table of part numbers

NOTE: No additional mounts are required. The mounts are included with the stand but are specific to where the stand is attached to the conveyor. See opposing page.

Stand Widths-WW (nominal conveyor width in inches) 02

There are three different stand types.

NOTE: Conveyors 4” wide and under will have the stand framework on the outside of the conveyor; and the minimum height range is 12 - 15 inches

Aluminum Cross Ties To order: Cross Ties - Available Lengths Inches 24” 36” 48” 60” 72” 96” 120” 144”

LLL 024 036 048 060 072 096 120 144

Casters

Part No. LLL 125 - 0235 - F F F Enter length of cross ties needed into the “LLL” section above. A quantity of one includes (2) cross ties. Note: Cross ties require customer to cut to length because of stand placement variations. Example:125-0235-024 To be used in conjunction with the aluminum stands at the top of the page. See opposing page for typical layouts

Swivel-In T Nut

To order: Part No. 125-0122-04 Swivel locking caster Order (2) per stand Casters can be added to either aluminum or steel stands. Swivel locking casters increase stand height by 5.50”. Casters should only be used with stands that are 1/3 as wide as they are tall.

To order: Part No. 125-0074-036 (Qty 1) 125-0074-036-SET (Qty 4) The Swivel-In Tee Nut is ideal for mounting brackets to an aluminum stand, and allows quick mounting location changes. 1/4 - 20 thread in Tee-Nut is provided for attaching accessories

Casters are not recommended on multi-frame conveyors. NOTE: All applications will require the end user to properly lag stands and ensure stability. Because every application and installation is different, the functionality and performance of the supports depend on the end user. QC Industries can aid in determining the supports your application requires.

106

QC Industries

513.753.6000

NOTE: The conveyor profile adds 1.89” to the overall height

End Drive Typical Stand Layout Drive Support Stand Frame Joint Stand

Example: 0182DS-33-36-12

Example: 0182FJ-33-36-12

Example: 0182-33-36-12

Center Drive Typical Stand Layout

Frame Joint Stand

Example: 0182FJ-33-36-18

Example: 0182-33-36-18

Aluminum Exact Width Stand

Frame Joint Stand

Example: 0182-33-36-18

Drive Support Stand

Prefix

H1-H2*

WW**

Prefix

H1-H2*

WW**

Prefix

H1-H2*

WW**

0182-

03-06

see below¹

0182FJ-

06-09

see below¹

0182DS-

12-15

see below

0182-

06-09

see below¹

0182FJ-

09-12

see below¹

0182DS-

15-18

see below

0182-

09-12

see below¹

0182FJ-

12-15

see below

0182DS-

18-21

see below

0182-

12-15

see below

0182FJ-

15-18

see below

0182DS-

21-24

see below

0182-

15-18

see below

0182FJ-

18-21

see below

0182DS-

24-27

see below

21-24

see below

0182DS-

27-30

see below

0182-

18-21

see below

0182FJ-

0182-

21-24

see below

0182FJ-

24-27

see below

0182DS-

30-33

see below

0182-

24-27

see below

0182FJ-

27-30

see below

0182DS-

33-36

see below

0182-

27-30

see below

0182FJ-

30-33

see below

0182DS-

36-39

see below

0182-

30-33

see below

0182FJ-

33-36

see below

0182DS-

39-42

see below

0182-

33-36

see below

0182FJ-

36-39

see below

0182DS-

42-45

see below

0182-

36-39

see below

0182FJ-

39-42

see below

0182DS-

45-48

see below

0182-

39-42

see below

0182FJ-

42-45

see below

0182DS-

48-51

see below

45-48

see below

0182DS-

51-54

see below

0182-

42-45

see below

0182FJ-

0182-

45-48

see below

0182FJ-

48-51

see below

0182DS-

54-57

see below

0182-

48-51

see below

0182FJ-

51-54

see below

0182DS-

57-60

see below

0182-

51-54

see below

0182FJ-

54-57

see below

Example: 0182DS-27-30-10

0182-

54-57

see below

0182FJ-

57-60

see below

¹Not compatible with the following conveyor widths: 2”, 3”, 4”

57-60 see below 0182Example: 0182-27-30-10 * Conveyor adds 1.89” to the overall height

Example: 0182FJ-27-30-10

**WW (Conveyor Width) 02

To Order: 1) Choose the height range from the left and enter into H1 & H2 section of the part number 2) Enter the conveyor width into the WW section 3) If the conveyor is over 120” in length, it will be constructed in sections. Those sections are denoted on the conveyor ordering page (pg. 95 or 99). Place a stand at each frame joint. Denote those stands by adding the suffix FJ to the stand part number. 4) End drive 250’s require a stand at the drive. Denote this stand by adding the suffix DS to the stand part number.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

107

250 Series Drives Drive Sizing Technical Data The equivalent load was determined in the conveyor technical data pages (pages 94 & 98). To choose a gear motor combination that works best for the application, the next step is to convert that equivalent load into the torque required and size a drive based upon its use. The user must know the belt speed (in feet per minute), service factor (determined below), and the duty cycle of the application. The steps below guide the user through this process. These steps will utimately compare the torque required to move the load on the conveyor (Required Conveyor Drive Torque) and the torque the drive train is capable of producing (Supplied Drive Train Torque).

1. Calculate Required Conveyor Drive Torque (RCDT) Enter the equivalent load determined on page 94 or 98. Divide this number by 2. The result equals the torque required for the application, or the required conveyor drive torque (RCDT). Enter RCDT on Line One.

2. Select Belt Speed & Enter Drive Train Torque (DTT)

Choose the belt speed from one of the following pages to write down the drive train torque (DTT) for the selected speed. Please note that there are two gearbox types listed; standard and high capacity, for each speed. Enter the drive train torque on Line Two.

3. Enter Service Factor (SF) Use Chart 108-A below, based upon the hours of operation per day as well as starts and stops per hour. Enter the result on Line Three.

Service Factor - Chart 108-A 5. Determine Functionality

A) Slow down the belt speed B) Choose high capacity gearbox C) Choose a wider conveyor D) Consult factory

Hours of Operation per Day 24 2 16 8 Service Factor

2.1

1.8

1.6

1.4

2.0

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.9

1.6

1.4

1.2

1.8

1.5

1.3

1.1

1.7

1.4

1.2

1.0

Starts and Stops per Hour

Factor

Proceed to the next page for instructions on how to use the remaining drive pages.

108

Example:

Equivalent load = 150 (per conveyor technical data page) 150 / 2 = 75 (RCDT) 30 FPM (From page 111 - end drive) 169 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (Standard capacity gearbox) 8 hours per day with no starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.2) 169 / 1.2 = 140 inch lbs. (SDTT)

Equivalent load = 250 (per conveyor technical data page) 250 / 2 = 125 (RCDT) 100 FPM (From page 113 - center drive) 181 inch lbs. of torque (DTT) (High Capacity Gearbox) 16 hours per day with (10) starts and stops (Service Factor is 1.5) 181 / 1.5 = 121 inch lbs. (SDTT)

RCDT = 75 SDTT = 140

RCDT = 125 SDTT = 121

140 7 75 (Gearmotor assembly will provide adequate torque)

121 < 125 (Gearmotor assembly will not provide adequate torque)

QC Industries

513.753.6000

100

Step 1: Step 2

Drive Location

Choose an end or center drive (end drive pages 110 & 111, center drive pages 112 & 113)

Sizing Info

Step 1 250 Series End Drive End Drive

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive

Sizing Information FPM*

OB0 / OB3 /

Drive Location

20 25

-.04 .78

30 40

A0 A3

50 60 75 80 3.64

10.94

90 100

110 115 120 125 150 160

1.89

Note:

180

If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, or C0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3 dimensions.

220 C0 C3

230 250

Reference these drawings and the table below

300 340 13.34

360

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120 239 106 210 88 176 83 164 77 153 64 128 57 113 53 106

Step 2:

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part No.

Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt/Chain Sprocket Size 0or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 34 8M 30or 3J 30 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 22 8M 30or 3J 25 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 28 8M 30or 3J 30 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 32 8M 30or 3J 34 8M 3-

Prefix Mounting Position* M2-

M2-

Motor Information

Example: 253-15G Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand

Prefix

1,3,V, D-

G or J

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

16 25 16 33 25 50 25 50 33 75 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H 50 1H

1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D1,3,V, D-

30 30 20 20 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05

G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1

32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22

Choose mounting arrangement & drive location

Voltage

Conv Sprocket

3.6/1.9 4.6/2.6 3.6/1.9 7.2/3.6 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 4.6/2.6 8.8/4.4 7.2/3.6 10.6/5.3 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2 8.8/4.4 12.4/6.2

DC Amp 1.7

Face 42C

1.7

42C

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2/0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7

1.7 2.5 1.7 3.5 2.5 5 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10

42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

1.3/.6

Step 3: Choose a speed

Step 4: Run drive sizing calculations listed on page 108

*See drive position chart

*Speeds Vary +/- 4 FPM

Step 5:

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-E3J3-8M3225 (End Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Motor Dimension Chart 161

163

16V

251

253

25V

331

333

33V

501

503

50V 503ID

751

Voltage Key

753 75V 753ID 1001 1003 100V 1003ID

110

B0 5.20

4.69

4.98

5.19 5.20

4.99

6.20

5.20

5.01

6.15

B3 6.78

6.78

4.68

6.19 6.19

4.68

6.19

4.68

6.15

6.19 4.98

6.13

6.76

7.19

7.19 6.13

8.18

C0 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

C3 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.19

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

QC Industries

6.19 4.98

7.23 7.23

Notes: 7.19

6.19

6.56

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon start-up torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

513.753.6000

250 Series

1 115 VAC 1 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38 3 230/460 VAC 3 PH For optional AC controls, see p. 38 V 90 VDC w/controller See controller on p. 38 D 90 VDC w/o controller Customer to supply controller

A0 11.39 10.48 11.38 12.38 12.41 12.31 12.17 12.40 13.27 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 A3 12.18 12.18 12.19 13.26 13.26 13.13 13.26 13.26 14.06 13.85 13.22 15.84 14.08 15.19 13.26 15.63 13.50 15.19 14.19 16.51 13.76

See Drive Accessories pages (p. 114) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

111

Step 6 Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - End Drive

Step 3

Sizing Information FPM* 15 20 25

Speed

30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100 110

Step 5

115 120 125 150

Torque (DTT) Inch Lbs. 185 317 186 259 204 321 169 266 144 287 170 359 141 297 170 371 160 349 140 307 86 181 118 257 110 240 71 150 102 224 128 253 120

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt/Chain Sprocket Size 08M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 22 308M or 3J 25 308M or 3J 32 308M or 3J 28 308M or 3J 28 308M or 3J 34 308M or 3J 30 308M or 3J 22 30-

Prefix Mounting Position* M2-

M2-

1G G

Motor Part No.

Motor Information

Example: 253-15G Gearbox Voltage Ratio Hand

Voltage

Conv Sprocket

Prefix

1,3,V, D-

G or J

115/230 230/460 Amp Amp 1/6 3.6/1.9 1.3/.6

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

1,3,V, D-

G or J

1/6 3.6/1.9

1.3/.6

1.7

42C

16 25 16 33 25 50 25 50 33 75 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 33 75 25 50 33 75 50 1H 50

30 30 20 20 15 15 15 15 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 10 10 15 15 10 10 05 05 05

G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J G or J

1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2

1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.6/.8 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.6/.8 3/1.5 1.3/.6 2.0/1.0 1.6/.8 3/1.5 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2 0/1 0

1.7 2.5 1.7 3.5 2.5 5 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 3.5 7.6 2.5 5 3.5 7.6 5 10 5

42C 42C 42C 42C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C

32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34

Choose standard or high capacity gearbox. Note: Each speed has two rows. The top row is a standard capacity gearbox, and the bottom is a high capacity gearbox. Some speed and gearbox selections will have two different horsepower motors.

DC Amp 1.7

Step 6:

Face 42C

Choose voltage requirements Voltage

Step 7: Put together two part numbers, motor mounting package and motor by following from left to right

Voltage Key

Torque

QC Industries

115VAC 1 PH

230/460 VAC 3 PH

90 VDC w/controller

90 VDC w/o controller

513.753.6000

109

250 Series End Drive End Drive

B0 DIA. B3 DIA. Drive Location

D0 D3 A0 A3

10.94

3.64

Note:

1.89 *

If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 dimensions.

C0 C3

7.83

Reference these drawings and the table below 13.34

Motor Dimension Chart 161

163

16V

251

253

25V

331

333

33V

501

503

50V 503ID

751

753 75V 753ID 1H1

1H3 1HV

1H3ID

110

B0 5.20

4.69

4.98

5.19 5.20

4.99

6.20

5.20

5.01

6.15

6.19 4.98

7.23

B3 6.78

6.78

4.68

6.19 6.19

4.68

6.19

4.68

6.15

6.19 4.98

7.23

7.19

6.19

6.13

6.76

7.19

7.19 6.13

8.18

C0 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

C3 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.19

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

.78

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive

Sizing Information FPM* 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100 110 115 120 125 150 160 180 220 230 250 300 340 360

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part No.

Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt Mounting Position* Prefix Sprocket Size 08M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M23-

Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22

Example: 253-15G Gearbox Prefix Voltage Ratio Hand 1,3,V, DG or J 50 16 50 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 40 16 1,3,V, D16 1,3,V, D40 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, DG or J 30 16 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D30 G or J 25 1,3,V, D30 G3 or J3 16 1,3,V, D20 G or J 33 1,3,V, D20 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 25 1,3,V, D15 G or J 50 1,3,V, D15 G3 or J3 33 1,3,V, D10 G or J 75 1,3,V, D10 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3 50 1,3,V, D05 G or J 1H 1,3,V, D05 G3 or J3

Motor Information Voltage

HP 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1

115/230 Amp 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 3.6/1.9 7.4/3.7 3.6/1.9 5.2/2.8 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 7.4/3.7 8.8/4.4 5.2/2.8 10.8/5.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4 8.8/4.4 2.8/1.4

230/460 Amp 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 1.3/0.6 2.1/1.0 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7

DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 4.8 1.7 3.2 4.8 5 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10

Face 42 56 42 56 42 56 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Voltage Key

Notes:

1 3 V D

115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

For optional AC controls, see p. 114 For optional AC controls, see p. 114 See controller on p. 114 Customer to supply controller

1. ALL above gearmotors are UL and CSA approved 2. Torque values are based upon running torque 3. Inverter duty variable frequency rated motors are available in 1/2, 3/4, and 1 HP. Add an ID to the end of the part number. 4. Please note that all inverter duty motors have a non-removable foot mount on them

See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

111

250 Series Center Drive

Center Drive

B0 DIA. B3 DIA. Drive Location D0 D3

A0 A3

10.94

3.64

Note:

1.89 *

If your application requires a standard capacity gearbox, use the A0, B0, C0, and D0 dimensions. If it uses a high capacity gearbox, use the A3, B3, C3, and D3 dimensions.

C0 C3

7.83

Reference these drawings and the table below

13.34

Motor Dimension Chart 161

163

16V

251

253

25V

331

333

33V

501

503

50V 503ID

751

753 75V 753ID 1H1

1H3 1HV

1H3ID

112

B0 5.20

4.69

4.98

5.19 5.20

4.99

6.20

5.20

5.01

6.15

6.19 4.98

7.23

B3 6.78

6.78

4.68

6.19 6.19

4.68

6.19

4.68

6.15

6.19 4.98

7.23

7.19

6.19

6.13

6.76

7.19

7.19 6.13

8.18

C0 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

5.82 5.82

5.82

C3 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.19

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

6.56 6.56

6.56

.78

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Heavy Duty Electric - Fixed or Variable Speed - 250 Drive

Sizing Information FPM* 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 90 100 110 115 120 125 150 160 180 220 230 250 300 340 360

*Speeds Vary up to +/- 4 FPM

Mounting Part Number

Motor Part No.

Example: M2-C1G0-8M2234 GMtr. Gearbox Belt Prefix Mounting Position* Size Sprocket 08M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 22 C M2308M 1G or 3J 25 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 28 C M2308M 1G or 3J 30 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 32 C M2308M 1G or 3J 34 C M23-

Conv Sprocket 34 32 34 32 32 34 32 34 32 32 25 30 28 22 28 34 32 32 30 28 28 25 22 22

Motor Information Voltage

HP 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/6 1/4 1/6 1/3 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3 3/4 1/4 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 1

230/460 Amp 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/.6 1.3/0.6 2.1/1.0 1.3/0.6 1.5/0.7 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.1/1.0 2.0/1.0 1.5/0.7 1.1 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7 2.0/1.0 3.4/1.7

DC Amp 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7 4.8 1.7 3.2 4.8 5 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 3.2 7.6 4.8 5 3.2 7.6 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10

Face 42 56 42 56 42 56 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 42C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C 56C

*See Drive Location chart

Motor Part No. Example: 1H3-05J3 (230/460VAC 1HP Gearmotor@300 FPM)

Mounting Part Number Example: M2-C3J3-8M3225 (250 Mounting Pkg w/high capacity gearbox)

Voltage Key

Notes:

1 3 V D

115 VAC 1 PH 230/460 VAC 3 PH 90 VDC w/controller 90 VDC w/o controller

For optional AC controls, see p. 114 For optional AC controls, see p. 114 See controller on p. 114 Customer to supply controller

See Drive Accessories (pages 114-115) for optional controllers, motor starters, e-stops, cords, switches, and plugs

QC Industries

513.753.6000

113

250 Series Drive Accessories Motor Controls 6.00

Specifications/Features:

5.00 3X .19 DIA.

8.00

5.00

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-01 125-0149-09*

1.25

3.45

Standard DC Control

Standard NEMA 1DC Control Wiring: cords & plugs

*Includes 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to AC plug and 8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord from control to motor with male/female disconnects (wired).

2.50

2X .88 DIA.

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

4.45

2.84 2.40

4.57

5.13

5.73

.34

4X .18 DIA.

115V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230V AC, 1 phase input, IP20 230 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20 460 V AC, 3 phase input, IP20

Standard AC Control Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38

2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown DC Control

2.20

NEMA 4X DC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor 5.63

Specifications/Features:

.19 7.20

6.35

.85

5.16 2X 3/4 NPT 4.56 2.12

Washdown AC Control

2.20

1.20

Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire this controller to the gearmotor

114

QC Industries

513.753.6000

NEMA 4X AC Control

This 4X washdown controller can be used in a wet or dusty environment.

Motion Controls .25 DIA.

3.63

5.13

5.75 Specifications/Features: 115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 hz input, 1/2 hp max 230 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max 460 V AC, 3 phase input, 1 1/2 hp max UL/CSA/CE Start/Stop buttons IP55 Enclosure

2.00 .72

To Order: Part Number: 125-0054-38-115 125-0054-38-230 125-0054-38-460

4X 1/2 DIA. KNOCKOUT

Motor Starter Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

TURN TO RELEASE E-STOP 3.13

2.50

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE E-Stop can be locked out/includes start button IP55 Rated

2.25

Note: Mounts directly to motor starter enclosure

5.88

LOCK-OUT TAG-OUT To Order: Part Number: ELECT-061

E-Stop Accessory Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

2X .22 DIA.

3.00

2.37

Specifications/Features: Turn to release UL/CSA/CE IP65 Enclosure

2.89

2.67

E-Stop Accessory for Motor Starter

3.50

2.75

To Order: Part Number: ELECT-063-WBRKT

3.76

Remote E-Stop

115 V AC, 1ph w/enclosure 230 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure 460 V AC, 3 ph w/enclosure

E-Stop with enclosure

Note: Includes mounting bracket to mount to conveyor frame Note: It is the responsibility of the end user to properly wire motor starter and e-stops

Optional Cords, Plugs, & Switches

Heavy Duty Motor Options Part Number

Description

125-0149-05

ON/OFF switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-06

FORWARD/REVERSE switch for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-07

8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord and plug for 1 PH heavy duty motor

125-0149-09

8â&#x20AC;&#x2122; cord and plug for 90VDC motor - see controller for details

QC Industries

513.753.6000

115

125 Series Application Assistance Form Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com

Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation. 1

Record your part numbers here: 1

5 3

4 5 7

6 7

Application Details

Conveyor Side/Guide Rails Mounts Stands/CrossTies Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers/Drives

Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself: Part Dimensions: Concentrated Uniformly Distributed Equivalent Load Chemical Consideration FDA Consideration USDA Consideration Static Electricity Consideration

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

L H Side Loading Accumulating

Application Notes

Area to sketch ideas/layouts

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip 1

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1 Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: If you have an FDA consideration, you will want to choose a corrosion resistant construction with a stainless steel frame.

Step 2 Choose the width and length (in inches) you require. Please figure the equivalent load on the conveyor to ensure you have correctly sized a conveyor for the application. Record your equivalent load here.

Step 3 Choose from the options in the catalog (pages 11, 15, 19, 47, or 51). *Application hint: Gang driven applications require different drive pulleys. Reference page 41 for details. Different tail pulleys are described on pages 42 and 43.

Step 4 Choose a belt from page 15, 20-21, 51, or 52-53. Record your part number above.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Belt Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length (in inches) Width (in inches) Frame Style (H= Straight) Frame Type (See page 11, 15, or 19) Construction (S=Standard, R=Corrosion Resistant) Drive Type (E=End Drive) Series (1=125)

Side/Guide Rails

Step 1

Choose from the options listed on pages 22-25 and 54-57. *Application hint: Adjustable guide rails have an extra digit at the end of the part number (see page 23).

125

Step 2

Conveyor Length (in inches)

Choose the rail or guide identifier from pages 22-24 or 54-57.

Side/Guide Identifier

Step 3

Prefix

Enter the nominal length of the conveyor in these three positions. Note: Some product containment/lane divider/hopper part numbers have slightly different part number legends. Please refer to those pages for the correct part number. Record your part number on previous page. 3

Conveyor Mounts

Step 1 1

Choose from the options listed on pages 26-27, and 58. *Application hint: Mounts are used to attach conveyors to stands and other surfaces. Some mounts will not work with certain belting or conveyor configurations. Check the Notes area to ensure compatibility.

125

Step 2

Mount Specific Suffix

Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator of how it is mounted or a conveyor width.

Mount Identifier Prefix

Step 3 Enter mount specific suffix. Record your part number on previous page. 4

Stands

Step 1

Choose from the options listed on pages 28, 29, and 59. *Application hint: Choose between aluminum, powder coated steel, or stainless steel stands. Note that powder coated steel stands extend wider than conveyor width.

Stand Width Upper height range

Step 2 Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.

Lower height range Stand Identifier

Step 3 Choose the stand width. Reference pages 28-29 and 59. Note: QC recommends cross ties (see pages 28-29) for all applications. Additionally we recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting

Step 1

Enter M1 in the first two digits.

Step 2 Refer to page 31 and 61 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.

Step 3 Refer to pages 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65 to choose reducer type and handing.

Sprocket/pulley combinations Belt/chain identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (1=125) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 4 If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket combinations (page 33, 35, 37, 63, or 65) Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor

Step 1

Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 31 or 61.

Step 2 Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: If choosing a heavy duty motor, choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold separately.

Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3 Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

125 Z Series Application Assistance Form Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com

Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation. 2

Record your part numbers here: 1

1 2 3

3 4 5

6 7

Application Details

Conveyor Guide Rails Flared Rails / Hopper Stands/CrossTies Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers/Drives

Please use this space to denote some information about the application itself: Part Dimensions: Concentrated Uniformly Distributed Equivalent Load

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

L H Side Loading Accumulating

Application Notes Dimensions Record all the known dimensions of the application in the boxes to the right. For a ‘U’ or ‘N’ application please contact the factory. Denote ‘Z’ Conveyor Application Here

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip 1

Denote ‘L’ Conveyor Application Here

Denote ‘R’ Conveyor Application Here

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1 Choose from the options in the catalog (page 80). *Application hint: Please follow the instructions on page 78 and build the application and part number from pages 78 through 81.

Belt

Cleats

Step 2 Choose the width, length, and angle your application requires. *Application hint: Each configuration (Z, L, or R) has different length sections. The angle is always denoted after the first frame section. Ex 024B036

Step 3 Choose from the options in the catalog (page 81).

Step 4 Choose a belt from page 81. *Application hint: Cleat width and useable belt width is determined by the rail systems chosen; a corrugated sidewall (rail built into the belt) or a guide rail.

Step 5 Determine the number of cleats along the belt (page 81) Record your part number above.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length and angle Width (in inches) Frame Style (Z,L, or R) Frame Type (See page 80) Construction (S=Standard) Drive Type (E=End Drive) Series (1=125)

Guide Rails

Note:

Fill in this part number only when using an adjustable guide rail (page 82) instead of a corrugated sidewall belt. Otherwise, skip this step. *Application hint: Adjustable guide rails leave a clearance between the bottom of the rail and the belt. If carrying small parts consider a corrugated sidewall belt.

028 C Frame

A Frame B Frame Angle Side/Guide Identifier Prefix

Step 1 Enter the series and guide rail designator as shown.

Step 2 Enter the angle (B,C,D,E, or F).

Step 3 Enter the frame section lengths (in inches) for sections a, b, and c (c option for Z configurations). 3

Flared Rails / Hopper

Step 1 Choose from the options listed on page 83. *Application hint: Combine the flared side rails and end stops together for a hopper. See bottom of page 83.

1004 0234

Step 2 Choose a flared side rail (1004) and/or one or two end stops (0234).

Step 3

Rail Specific Suffix Rail Identifier Stop Specific Suffix End Stop Identifier

Prefix

Enter the three digit length for the flared rail (make sure it is 6” smaller than the a section). Enter the two digit width for the end stop. Record your part number on previous page. 4

Stands

Step 1 1

Enter the prefix number as shown. *Application hint: If you application requires an infeed height of 9” or less choose from the stands on page 84, otherwise reference page 85)

223

Step 2

Stand Width Upper height range Lower height range Caster or Foot Stand Identifier

Choose a caster or foot type stand.

Step 3 Choose the top of belt height range for your application. Use the information from pages 84 - 85 in choosing your stands. Reference pages 84 - 85 in choosing the standard height ranges.

Step 4 Choose the width of your conveyor. Note: low range stands do not require this designation. We recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting

Step 1

Enter M1 in the first two digits.

Step 2 Refer to page 87 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose top, bottom, side, or remote, and drive position.

Step 3 Refer to page 89 to choose reducer type and hand.

Sprocket/pulley combinations Belt/chain identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (1=125) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 4 If this is a top or bottom drive, choose belt or chain, then fill in the pulley/sprocket combinations (page 89). Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor

Step 1

Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 87.

Step 2 Choose the voltage of the motor. Application hint: Choose a ‘V’ option to have a 90VDC gearmotor with a controller. Choose a ‘D’ option for a 90VDC gearmotor and supply your own. All AC controllers are sold seperately.

Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3 Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

250 Series Application Assistance Form Please photocopy these pages to send to QC Industries

QC Industries 4057 Clough Woods Dr. Batavia, OH 45103 513.753.6000 Fax 513.753.6001 www.qcindustries.com

Use these sheets in conjunction with the catalog pages to record the part numbers. This sheet can be used to document your application and request a quotation. 2

Record your part numbers here: 1 2

6 3 4

4 5 6 7

Conveyor Guide Rails Mounts Stands / Cross Ties Gearmotor Mounting Gearmotor Controllers / Drives

For surface mounting

Application Details

Part Description Load Information Part Weight Max Load Environment Information Environment Description

L H Side Loading Accumulating

Application Notes

Area to sketch ideas/layouts

Contact Information Company Address City, State, Zip 1

Contact Phone Fax

Conveyor Details

Step 1 Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99). *Application hint: Center drives offer longer conveyor lengths. 1

Step 2 Choose the width and length your application requires. *Application hint: Conveyor lengths 120” and uder are made from one frame. Those over 120” are made with multiple frames. The center drive has a nominal 48” drive frame section while the end drive has a nominal 36” drive frame section. Reference drawings on pages 92 and 96 for details Note: Center drive conveyors have the drive pulley located in the center of the conveyor length. For other drive locations options contact the factory.

Step 3 Choose from the options in the catalog (page 95 or 99).

Step 4 Choose a belt from pages 100-101. *Application hint: Some longer conveyor applications may require the belt to be mechanically spliced. Consult the factory for details. Record your part number above.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Belt Tail Drive Pulley Drive Location Length (in inches) Width (in inches) Frame Style (H= Horizontal) Frame Type (See page 95 or 99) Construction (S=Standard) Drive Type (E=End Drive or C= Center Drive) Series (2=250)

Side/Guide Rails

Step 1

Choose from the options listed on pages 102-104.

250

Step 2

Conveyor Length or frame length (in inches) Side/Guide Identifier

Choose the identifier from pages 102-103. Prefix

Step 3 Enter the nominal length of the conveyor or the frame section. *Application hint: The bolt on extrusions are slightly shorter than the actual frame length. Record your part number on previous page. 3

Conveyor Mounts

Step 1 1

Choose from the options listed on page 105. *Application hint: Mounts for the 250 Series are used for surface mounting only. They are not needed if using the stands listed on pages 106-107.

125

Step 2

Mount Specific Suffix

Enter the two digit suffix for the mount you have chosen. This suffix could be a designator of how it is mounted or a conveyor width.

Mount Identifier Prefix

Step 3 Enter mount specific suffix Record your part number on previous page. 4

Stands

Step 1

Choose from the options listed on pages 106-107. *Application hint: Reference the drawings on page 107 for typical stand layouts and part numbers. Certain stands require a two digit stand style to be added to the four digit prefix.

0182

Step 2 Choose the upper and lower stand height ranges. Reference pages 28-29 and 59.

Stand Style Stand Identifier

Stand Width Upper height range Lower height range

Step 3 Choose the stand width. Reference page 107 Note: QC recommends cross ties (see page 106) for all applications. Additionally, we recommend that the stands be bolted to the floor. Record your part number on previous page. 5

Gearmotor Mounting

Step 1 Enter M2 in the first two digits. *Application hint: There are two different capacity gearboxes to choose from (standard or high) Refer to sizing instructions on page 108.

Step 2 Refer to page 108-109 for help in creating part number and sizing the drive. Then choose an end or center drive and which side of the conveyor the drive will be attached. *Application hint: Both center and end drives use a ‘C’ designator.

Step 3 Refer to pages 110 or 112 to choose reducer type and hand. If using a high capacity gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right.

Sprocket combinations Belt identifier Gear reducer size & handing Motor mounting position & type Series (2=250) Mounting (M=Mounting)

Step 4 Choose the belt identifier and enter the sprocket ratios as listed on page 111 or 113. Record your part number on previous page. 6

Gearmotor

Step 1 Choose the horsepower based upon sizing instructions on page 108. Note that some applications require a high capacity gearbox which will require a different horsepower motor be chosen

Gear reducer ratio Voltage Horsepower

Step 3 Choose the gear reducer listed in the table that corresponds to your previous selections. If using a high capacity gearbox you will enter a ‘3’ into the shaded box shown in the legend to the right. Record your part number on previous page.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

Warranty & RGA QC INDUSTRIES CONVEYOR WARRANTY QC INDUSTRIES warrants that our conveyors are free from defects in materials and workmanship and fit for the ordinary purposes for which such goods are used, under normal installation, use and service for one (1) year from date of purchase or 2100 hours of running use, whichever is sooner. QC INDUSTRIES will replace any defective part within the warranty period, without charge, provided: 1. The Purchaser gives QC INDUSTRIES prompt written notice of the defect, including the date of purchase and original purchase order number. 2. The Purchaser will then be given a return goods authorization number (RGA #) which must be displayed on all labels and packing slips returned with merchandise. (See RGA section) 3. The Purchaser pays for delivery of the defective part to QC Industries for inspection and verification of the defect. 4. The Purchaser shall pay all shipping and insurance charges for the replacement part from QC INDUSTRIES and the cost of installing the replacement part. This warranty is limited to the replacement of defective parts. QC INDUSTRIES WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ANY DEFECT IN THIS UNIT. This warranty shall not apply if any failure of this unit or its parts is caused by unreasonable use, lack of maintenance, improper maintenance and/or repairs, incorrect adjustments, exposure to corrosive or abrasive material, moisture causing damage, or any modification or alteration affecting the operation of the unit which is not authorized by QC INDUSTRIES in writing. This warranty shall not apply to the following items that are covered by their manufacturer's warranty, subject to any limitation contained in those warranties. (A) Bearings (B) Motors

(E) Casters (F) Belts (unless otherwise agreed to in writing)

CAUTION: Any attempt to repair such items may actually void the manufacturer's warranty. Any description of this unit is only to identify it and it not a warranty that the unit fits the description. Only an official of QC INDUSTRIES may make any warranties for QC INDUSTRIES. Any warranties implied by law are limited in duration to the one (1) year term of this warranty. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN, QC INDUSTRIES MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY FOR FITNESS OR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. LOST OR DAMAGED GOODS: PLEASE READ THESE IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Shipments should be inspected immediately upon receipt for lost or damaged goods. Any loss or damage should be noted on the carriers receipt (or bill of lading) at the time of acceptance. If items are perceived to be lost or damaged after the shipment has been accepted, it becomes more difficult to file a claim with the carrier if the receipt does not indicate such loss or damage. Do not, at any time, request the carrier to return any items or shipment to QC Industries without previous authorization from our company for such a return. Please notify QC Industries as soon as any loss or damage is discovered and request the department that handles the lost or damaged goods. You will need to know a complete description of all lost or damaged items. If replacement items are needed, a purchase order made out to QC Industries will need to be supplied. QC Industries will then contact the carrier's local agent and request that an inspection of the items be performed. This is absolutely necessary. Unless an inspection is performed, the carrier will not entertain any claim for loss or damage. After the inspection has been completed, the carrier will notify QC Industries. If the carrier takes responsibility for the claim, a credit will be issued to you for the replacement item(s), including freight charges from QC Industries, where applicable. If the carrier does not take responsibility for the claim, a representative of QC Industries will contact you.

RETURNED GOODS AUTHORIZATION AND ORDER CANCELLATION REVISION POLICY If, for any reason, an item needs to be returned to QC Industries or an in-house order needs to be cancelled or revised, the Purchaser is required to adhere to the following series of steps to ensure that the return or cancellation is handled in the proper manner. RGA POLICY/INSTRUCTIONS 1. Promptly call QC Industries at (513) 753-6000 and request the department that handles Returned Goods Authorization. At this time, you will be asked to answer pertinent questions relating to the returned items. We ask that you have the following information ready: • Name of distributor (if applicable) through which item(s) were purchased. • Name of the Customer and/or end user of the item(s). • Any/all purchase order numbers related to the item(s) in question. • Phone number and names of contacts involved in the return (as it may become necessary that they be contacted later). • Complete part numbers of all items involved in the return. • Complete description as the reason for the return and the actions that need to be taken. (If the item is to be replaced, a new purchase order number must be supplied by the Purchaser along with complete shipping and billing instructions. These replacements will be treated as separate orders by QC Industries and evaluated for possible credit only after returned items are received and evaluated.) 2. After the call has been made to QC Industries, we will process your RGA and you will be faxed the RGA number to use for returning the item(s). RGA numbers will not be given verbally over the phone. 3. Upon receipt of your RGA, you are required to return the item(s) within 30 days of receipt of said authorization. After 30 days, the Return Authorization will be void if item(s) have not been received by QC Industries. All shipping charges and freight insurance charges of returned goods will the responsibility of the Purchaser. 4. The RGA number must be clearly marked on the outside of all packages. It must also be on any paperwork, packing slips, or delivery receipts. If there is no RGA number visible on the package, the package may be refused and sent back at the Purchaser's expense. 5. After receipt of returned goods, QC Industries will evaluate the item(s) for credit and take the appropriate action based on each situation. Standard items are returned in new, resalable condition, will be credited for the amount of the purchase less 20%. Full credit will only be issued on items that are considered to be defective at the time of shipment from QC Industries and are evaluated to be under warranty. Please allow 30 days for credits to be issued. ORDER CANCELLATION/REVISION POLICY If it becomes necessary to cancel or revise an order prior to the order being shipped, QC Industries reserves the right to evaluate each order that is to be cancelled or revised and determine if any charges are applicable. A 20% Restocking Charge will apply if an order is assembled and ready to ship prior to its cancellation or revision and the order is totally comprised of standard stock items. If the order contains other than stock items, an evaluation will be made based on the status of the order. Additional charges will be included with the 20% Restocking Charge if any of the following conditions are met: 1. The order contains any items that are considered to be non-stock items and these items have already been produced by QC Industries or one of its suppliers. 2. The order contains any items that require special handling or assembly and these processes have been completed. 3. The Customer has specified that they will pick up an order from QC's facility by a predetermined time and that time frame has expired. In this case, QC will make an attempt to notify the Customer. If this cannot be accomplished in a reasonable time, the order will be disassembled and the Customer will be charged a restocking fee and any additional charges based on the order's contents as explained herein.

122

QC Industries

513.753.6000

QC Industries

125

ies Ser Stand ies ard 125 Ser Magn etic ies 125 Cle Ser a t i es C e 125 orro d ZS s i on 250 eries Ang Resista Ser nt led ies Fr Sta nda ame rd

LLC

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Conveyor Selection Guide

Accumulation Assembly Automotive Bar Code Scanning Bulk Product Clean Room Operations Cosmetics Curing Diverting Electronic Component Automation Food Processing High Temperature Applications Incline/Decline Operations Ink Jet Printing Inspection Labeling Machine Integration Material Handling Medical Metal Stamping Packaging Palletized Operations Parts Separation Part and Scrap Removal Pharmaceutical Plastics Molding Robotic Integration Scanning Weighing Workcells

125

Ser

This Guide is intended to provide a general reference as to the most common application use. For assistance contact our application specialists.

QC Industries

513.753.6000

123